Goto Section: 47cfr80.pdf.13 | 47cfr80.pdf.17 | Table of Contents

FCC 47cfr80.pdf.15
Revised as of October 1, 2007
Goto Year:2006 | 2008
  
   Skip to content. Skip to side navigation. Quick Navigation:
     * Resources by Topic
     * Business & Economy
     * Education
     * Environment
     * Food & Drugs
     * Grants & Awards
     * Health & Safety
     * Military & Security
     * Science & Technology
     * Social Programs
     * Transportation

   Skip to content. Skip to side navigation. 
   GPO Access Home Page. 

                                                        Quick Navigation:

   [Resources by Topic..] Jump to selected topic. 

                                                             Site Search:
                                                                 advanced

                                       ____________________ Submit Search

   Navigation Bar

             National Archives and Records Administration logo.

                             Database Features.

                                     •

   Browse

                                     •

   Simple Search 

                                     •

   Advanced Search

   * Boolean
                                 * Proximity
   • Search History
   • Search Tips

                                     •

   Corrections

                                     •

   Latest Updates
   • User Info
   • FAQs

                                     •

   Agency List

                                     •

   e-CFR Main Page

                             Related Resources

                                     •

   Code of Federal Regulations

                                     •

   Federal Register

                                     •

   List of CFR
   Sections Affected

                                     •

   Regulations.gov

                                     •

   Unified Agenda

                                     •

   All NARA Publications
   About Government.
   Ben's Guide Logo. 
   Ben's Guide
   to U.S.
   Government

                             Get Adobe Reader 

   Home Page > Executive Branch > Code of Federal Regulations > Electronic Code
   of Federal Regulations

                                 blue pill
                e-CFR Data is current as of October 1, 2007

   Title 47: Telecommunication

   Browse Previous | Browse Next

PART 15—RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES
   ___________________________________

   Section Contents
   
                             Subpart A—General

   § 15.1   Scope of this part.
   § 15.3   Definitions.
   § 15.5   General conditions of operation.
   § 15.7   [Reserved]
   § 15.9   Prohibition against eavesdropping.
   § 15.11   Cross reference.
   § 15.13   Incidental radiators.
   § 15.15   General technical requirements.
   § 15.17   Susceptibility to interference.
   § 15.19   Labelling requirements.
   § 15.21   Information to user.
   § 15.23   Home-built devices.
   § 15.25   Kits.
   § 15.27   Special accessories.
   § 15.29   Inspection by the Commission.
   § 15.31   Measurement standards.
   § 15.32   Test procedures for CPU boards and computer power supplies.
   § 15.33   Frequency range of radiated measurements.
   § 15.35   Measurement detector functions and bandwidths.
   § 15.37   Transition provisions for compliance with the rules.
   § 15.38   Incorporation by reference.
   
                     Subpart B—Unintentional Radiators

   § 15.101   Equipment authorization of unintentional radiators.
   § 15.102   CPU boards and power supplies used in personal computers.
   § 15.103   Exempted devices.
   § 15.105   Information to the user.
   § 15.107   Conducted limits.
   § 15.109   Radiated emission limits.
   § 15.111   Antenna power conduction limits for receivers.
   § 15.113   Power line carrier systems.
   § 15.115   TV interface devices, including cable system terminal devices.
   § 15.117   TV broadcast receivers.
   § 15.118   Cable ready consumer electronics equipment.
   § 15.119   Closed  caption  decoder requirements for analog television
   receivers.
   § 15.120   Program  blocking  technology  requirements  for television
   receivers.
   § 15.121   Scanning receivers and frequency converters used with scanning
   receivers.
   § 15.122   Closed  caption decoder requirements for digital television
   receivers and converter boxes.
   § 15.123   Labeling of digital cable ready products.
   
                      Subpart C—Intentional Radiators

   § 15.201   Equipment authorization requirement.
   § 15.202   Certified operating frequency range.
   § 15.203   Antenna requirement.
   § 15.204   External  radio  frequency  power  amplifiers  and  antenna
   modifications.
   § 15.205   Restricted bands of operation.
   § 15.207   Conducted limits.
   § 15.209   Radiated emission limits; general requirements.
   § 15.211   Tunnel radio systems.
   § 15.212   Modular transmitters.
   § 15.213   Cable locating equipment.
   § 15.214   Cordless telephones.
   Radiated Emission Limits, Additional Provisions
   § 15.215   Additional  provisions  to  the  general  radiated emission
   limitations.
   § 15.217   Operation in the band 160–190 kHz.
   § 15.219   Operation in the band 510–1705 kHz.
   § 15.221   Operation in the band 525–1705 kHz.
   § 15.223   Operation in the band 1.705–10 MHz.
   § 15.225   Operation within the band 13.11014.010 MHz.
   § 15.227   Operation within the band 26.9627.28 MHz.
   § 15.229   Operation within the band 40.6640.70 MHz.
   § 15.231   Periodic operation in the band 40.6640.70 MHz and above 70 MHz.
   § 15.233   Operation within the bands 43.7144.49 MHz, 46.60–46.98 MHz,
   48.75–49.51 MHz and 49.6650.0 MHz.
   § 15.235   Operation within the band 49.8249.90 MHz.
   § 15.237   Operation in the bands 72.073.0 MHz, 74.6–74.8 MHz and 75.276.0
   MHz.
   § 15.239   Operation in the band 88–108 MHz.
   § 15.240   Operation in the band 433.5434.5 MHz.
   § 15.241   Operation in the band 174–216 MHz.
   § 15.242   Operation in the bands 174–216 MHz and 470–668 MHz.
   § 15.243   Operation in the band 890–940 MHz.
   § 15.245   Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2435–2465 MHz, 5785–5815
   MHz, 10500–10550 MHz, and 24075–24175 MHz.
   § 15.247   Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and
   5725–5850 MHz.
   § 15.249   Operation  within  the  bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz,
   5725–5875 MHZ, and 24.024.25 GHz.
   § 15.250   Operation of wideband systems within the band 5925–7250 MHz.
   § 15.251   Operation  within  the bands 2.93.26 GHz, 3.267–3.332 GHz,
   3.339–3.3458 GHz, and 3.3583.6 GHz.
   § 15.252   Operation of wideband vehicular radar systems within the bands
   16.2–17.7 GHz and 23.1229.0 GHz.
   § 15.253   Operation within the bands 46.746.9 GHz and 76.077.0 GHz.
   § 15.255   Operation within the band 57–64 GHz.
   § 15.257   Operation within the band 92–95 GHz.
   
        Subpart D—Unlicensed Personal Communications Service Devices

   § 15.301   Scope.
   § 15.303   Definitions.
   § 15.305   Equipment authorization requirement.
   § 15.307   Coordination with fixed microwave service.
   § 15.309   Cross reference.
   § 15.311   Labeling requirements.
   § 15.313   Measurement procedures.
   § 15.315   Conducted limits.
   § 15.317   Antenna requirement.
   § 15.319   General technical requirements.
   § 15.321   [Reserved]
   § 15.323   Specific requirements for devices operating in the 1920–1930 MHz
   sub-band.
   
      Subpart E—Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure Devices

   § 15.401   Scope.
   § 15.403   Definitions.
   § 15.405   Cross reference.
   § 15.407   General technical requirements.
   
                     Subpart F—Ultra-Wideband Operation

   § 15.501   Scope.
   § 15.503   Definitions.
   § 15.505   Cross reference.
   § 15.507   Marketing of UWB equipment.
   § 15.509   Technical requirements for ground penetrating radars and wall
   imaging systems.
   § 15.510   Technical requirements for through D-wall imaging systems.
   § 15.511   Technical requirements for surveillance systems.
   § 15.513   Technical requirements for medical imaging systems.
   § 15.515   Technical requirements for vehicular radar systems.
   § 15.517   Technical requirements for indoor UWB systems.
   § 15.519   Technical requirements for hand held UWB systems.
   § 15.521   Technical requirements applicable to all UWB devices.
   § 15.523   Measurement procedures.
   § 15.525   Coordination requirements.
   
          Subpart G—Access Broadband Over Power Line (Access BPL)

   § 15.601   Scope.
   § 15.603   Definitions.
   § 15.605   Cross reference.
   § 15.607   Equipment authorization of Access BPL equipment.
   § 15.609   Marketing of Access BPL equipment.
   § 15.611   General technical requirements.
   § 15.613   Measurement procedures.
   § 15.615   General administrative requirements.
   ___________________________________

   Authority:   47 U.S.C. 154, 302a, 303, 304, 307, 336, and 544a.

   Source:    54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, unless otherwise noted.

Subpart A—General

   top

§ 15.1   Scope of this part.

   top

   (a)  This  part  sets  out the regulations under which an intentional,
   unintentional, or incidental radiator may be operated without an individual
   license. It also contains the technical specifications, administrative
   requirements and other conditions relating to the marketing of part 15
   devices.

   (b) The operation of an intentional or unintentional radiator that is not in
   accordance with the regulations in this part must be licensed pursuant to
   the provisions of section 301 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended,
   unless otherwise exempted from the licensing requirements elsewhere in this
   chapter.

   (c)  Unless  specifically  exempted,  the operation or marketing of an
   intentional or unintentional radiator that is not in compliance with the
   administrative  and technical provisions in this part, including prior
   Commission authorization or verification, as appropriate, is prohibited
   under section 302 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, and subpart
   I of part 2 of this chapter. The equipment authorization and verification
   procedures are detailed in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter.

§ 15.3   Definitions.

   top

   (a) Auditory assistance device. An intentional radiator used to provide
   auditory assistance to a handicapped person or persons. Such a device may be
   used  for auricular training in an education institution, for auditory
   assistance at places of public gatherings, such as a church, theater, or
   auditorium, and for auditory assistance to handicapped individuals, only, in
   other locations.

   (b) Biomedical telemetry device. An intentional radiator used to transmit
   measurements of either human or animal biomedical phenomena to a receiver.

   (c) Cable input selector switch. A transfer switch that is intended as a
   means to alternate between the reception of broadcast signals via connection
   to an antenna and the reception of cable television service.

   (d) Cable locating equipment. An intentional radiator used intermittently by
   trained  operators  to locate buried cables, lines, pipes, and similar
   structures or elements. Operation entails coupling a radio frequency signal
   onto the cable, pipes, etc. and using a receiver to detect the location of
   that structure or element.

   (e) Cable system terminal device (CSTD). A TV interface device that serves,
   as its primary function, to connect a cable system operated under part 76 of
   this  chapter  to  a TV broadcast receiver or other subscriber premise
   equipment. Any device which functions as a CSTD in one of its operating
   modes must comply with the technical requirements for such devices when
   operating in that mode.

   (f) Carrier current system. A system, or part of a system, that transmits
   radio  frequency energy by conduction over the electric power lines. A
   carrier current system can be designed such that the signals are received by
   conduction  directly  from  connection  to  the  electric  power lines
   (unintentional radiator) or the signals are received over-the-air due to
   radiation of the radio frequency signals from the electric power lines
   (intentional radiator).

   (g) CB receiver. Any receiver that operates in the Personal Radio Services
   on frequencies allocated for Citizens Band (CB) Radio Service stations, as
   well as any receiver provided with a separate band specifically designed to
   receive the transmissions of CB stations in the Personal Radio Services.
   This includes the following: (1) A CB receiver sold as a separate unit of
   equipment; (2) the receiver section of a CB transceiver; (3) a converter to
   be used with any receiver for the purpose of receiving CB transmissions;
   and,  (4)  a  multiband receiver that includes a band labelled “CB” or
   “11-meter” in which such band can be separately selected, except that an
   Amateur Radio Service receiver that was manufactured prior to January 1,
   1960, and which includes an 11-meter band shall not be considered to be a CB
   receiver.

   (h) Class A digital device. A digital device that is marketed for use in a
   commercial, industrial or business environment, exclusive of a device which
   is marketed for use by the general public or is intended to be used in the
   home.

   (i) Class B digital device. A digital device that is marketed for use in a
   residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and
   industrial environments. Examples of such devices include, but are not
   limited to, personal computers, calculators, and similar electronic devices
   that are marketed for use by the general public.

   Note:  The  responsible party may also qualify a device intended to be
   marketed in a commercial, business or industrial environment as a Class B
   device, and in fact is encouraged to do so, provided the device complies
   with the technical specifications for a Class B digital device. In the event
   that a particular type of device has been found to repeatedly cause harmful
   interference to radio communications, the Commission may classify such a
   digital device as a Class B digital device, regardless of its intended use.

   (j) Cordless telephone system. A system consisting of two transceivers, one
   a base station that connects to the public switched telephone network and
   the other a mobile handset unit that communicates directly with the base
   station. Transmissions from the mobile unit are received by the base station
   and  then placed on the public switched telephone network. Information
   received from the switched telephone network is transmitted by the base
   station to the mobile unit.

   Note: The Domestic Public Cellular Radio Telecommunications Service is
   considered  to be part of the switched telephone network. In addition,
   intercom and paging operations are permitted provided these are not intended
   to be the primary modes of operation.

   (k)  Digital  device.  (Previously  defined as a computing device). An
   unintentional radiator (device or system) that generates and uses timing
   signals or pulses at a rate in excess of 9,000 pulses (cycles) per second
   and uses digital techniques; inclusive of telephone equipment that uses
   digital techniques or any device or system that generates and uses radio
   frequency energy for the purpose of performing data processing functions,
   such as electronic computations, operations, transformations, recording,
   filing, sorting, storage, retrieval, or transfer. A radio frequency device
   that is specifically subject to an emanation requirement in any other FCC
   Rule part or an intentional radiator subject to subpart C of this part that
   contains  a digital device is not subject to the standards for digital
   devices, provided the digital device is used only to enable operation of the
   radio frequency device and the digital device does not control additional
   functions or capabilities.

   Note: Computer terminals and peripherals that are intended to be connected
   to a computer are digital devices.

   (l) Field disturbance sensor. A device that establishes a radio frequency
   field in its vicinity and detects changes in that field resulting from the
   movement of persons or objects within its range.

   (m)  Harmful  interference.  Any emission, radiation or induction that
   endangers the functioning of a radio navigation service or of other safety
   services  or  seriously degrades, obstructs or repeatedly interrupts a
   radiocommunications service operating in accordance with this chapter.

   (n) Incidental radiator. A device that generates radio frequency energy
   during the course of its operation although the device is not intentionally
   designed to generate or emit radio frequency energy. Examples of incidental
   radiators are dc motors, mechanical light switches, etc.

   (o) Intentional radiator. A device that intentionally generates and emits
   radio frequency energy by radiation or induction.

   (p) Kit. Any number of electronic parts, usually provided with a schematic
   diagram or printed circuit board, which, when assembled in accordance with
   instructions, results in a device subject to the regulations in this part,
   even if additional parts of any type are required to complete assembly.

   (q) Perimeter protection system. A field disturbance sensor that employs RF
   transmission lines as the radiating source. These RF transmission lines are
   installed in such a manner that allows the system to detect movement within
   the protected area.

   (r) Peripheral device. An input/output unit of a system that feeds data into
   and/or receives data from the central processing unit of a digital device.
   Peripherals  to  a digital device include any device that is connected
   external to the digital device, any device internal to the digital device
   that connects the digital device to an external device by wire or cable, and
   any circuit board designed for interchangeable mounting, internally or
   externally, that increases the operating or processing speed of a digital
   device, e.g., “turbo” cards and “enhancement” boards. Examples of peripheral
   devices include terminals, printers, external floppy disk drives and other
   data storage devices, video monitors, keyboards, interface boards, external
   memory expansion cards, and other input/output devices that may or may not
   contain digital circuitry. This definition does not include CPU boards, as
   defined in paragraph (bb) of this section, even though a CPU board may
   connect to an external keyboard or other components.

   (s) Personal computer. An electronic computer that is marketed for use in
   the  home,  notwithstanding  business applications. Such computers are
   considered  Class B digital devices. Computers which use a standard TV
   receiver as a display device or meet all of the following conditions are
   considered examples of personal computers:

   (1) Marketed through a retail outlet or direct mail order catalog.

   (2) Notices of sale or advertisements are distributed or directed to the
   general public or hobbyist users rather than restricted to commercial users.

   (3) Operates on a battery or 120 volt electrical supply.

   If  the  responsible  party  can  demonstrate that because of price or
   performance the computer is not suitable for residential or hobbyist use, it
   may request that the computer be considered to fall outside of the scope of
   this definition for personal computers.

   (t) Power line carrier systems. An unintentional radiator employed as a
   carrier  current  system  used  by an electric power utility entity on
   transmission lines for protective relaying, telemetry, etc. for general
   supervision of the power system. The system operates by the transmission of
   radio frequency energy by conduction over the electric power transmission
   lines of the system. The system does not include those electric lines which
   connect the distribution substation to the customer or house wiring.

   (u) Radio frequency (RF) energy. Electromagnetic energy at any frequency in
   the radio spectrum between 9 kHz and 3,000,000 MHz.

   (v) Scanning receiver. For the purpose of this part, this is a receiver that
   automatically switches among two or more frequencies in the range of 30 to
   960 MHz and that is capable of stopping at and receiving a radio signal
   detected on a frequency. Receivers designed solely for the reception of the
   broadcast signals under part 73 of this chapter, for the reception of NOAA
   broadcast weather band signals, or for operation as part of a licensed
   service are not included in this definition.

   (w)  Television  (TV) broadcast receiver. A device designed to receive
   television pictures that are broadcast simultaneously with sound on the
   television channels authorized under part 73 of this chapter.

   (x) Transfer switch. A device used to alternate between the reception of
   over-the-air radio frequency signals via connection to an antenna and the
   reception of radio frequency signals received by any other method, such as
   from a TV interface device.

   (y)  TV  interface  device. An unintentional radiator that produces or
   translates in frequency a radio frequency carrier modulated by a video
   signal derived from an external or internal signal source, and which feeds
   the modulated radio frequency energy by conduction to the antenna terminals
   or other non-baseband input connections of a television broadcast receiver.
   A TV interface device may include a stand-alone RF modulator, or a composite
   device consisting of an RF modulator, video source and other components
   devices. Examples of TV interface devices are video cassette recorders and
   terminal devices attached to a cable system or used with a Master Antenna
   (including those used for central distribution video devices in apartment or
   office buildings).

   (z) Unintentional radiator. A device that intentionally generates radio
   frequency energy for use within the device, or that sends radio frequency
   signals by conduction to associated equipment via connecting wiring, but
   which is not intended to emit RF energy by radiation or induction.

   (aa) Cable ready consumer electronics equipment. Consumer electronics TV
   receiving devices, including TV receivers, videocassette recorders and
   similar devices, that incorporate a tuner capable of receiving television
   signals  and an input terminal intended for receiving cable television
   service, and are marketed as “cable ready” or “cable compatible.” Such
   equipment shall comply with the technical standards specified in §15.118 and
   the provisions of §15.19(d).

   (bb) CPU board. A circuit board that contains a microprocessor, or frequency
   determining circuitry for the microprocessor, the primary function of which
   is to execute user-provided programming, but not including:

   (1) A circuit board that contains only a microprocessor intended to operate
   under the primary control or instruction of a microprocessor external to
   such a circuit board; or

   (2)  A  circuit  board that is a dedicated controller for a storage or
   input/output device.

   (cc) External radio frequency power amplifier. A device which is not an
   integral part of an intentional radiator as manufactured and which, when
   used in conjunction with an intentional radiator as a signal source, is
   capable of amplifying that signal.

   (dd) Test equipment is defined as equipment that is intended primarily for
   purposes of performing measurements or scientific investigations. Such
   equipment includes, but is not limited to, field strength meters, spectrum
   analyzers, and modulation monitors.

   (ee) Radar detector. A receiver designed to signal the presence of radio
   signals used for determining the speed of motor vehicles. This definition
   does not encompass the receiver incorporated within a radar transceiver
   certified under the Commission's rules.

   (ff) Access Broadband over Power Line (Access BPL). A carrier current system
   installed and operated on an electric utility service as an unintentional
   radiator that sends radio frequency energy on frequencies between 1.705 MHz
   and 80 MHz over medium voltage lines or over low voltage lines to provide
   broadband communications and is located on the supply side of the utility
   service's points of interconnection with customer premises. Access BPL does
   not include power line carrier systems as defined in §15.3(t) or In-House
   BPL as defined in §15.3(gg).

   (gg) In-House Broadband over Power Line (In-House BPL). A carrier current
   system, operating as an unintentional radiator, that sends radio frequency
   energy by conduction over electric power lines that are not owned, operated
   or controlled by an electric service provider. The electric power lines may
   be aerial (overhead), underground, or inside the walls, floors or ceilings
   of user premises. In-House BPL devices may establish closed networks within
   a user's premises or provide connections to Access BPL networks, or both.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 18340 , May 2, 1990;  57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992;  59 FR 25340 , May 16, 1994;  61 FR 31048 , June 19, 1996;
    62 FR 26242 , May 13, 1997;  64 FR 22561 , Apr. 27, 1999;  65 FR 64391 , Oct. 27,
   2000;  66 FR 32582 , June 15, 2001;  67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002;  70 FR 1373 ,
   Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.5   General conditions of operation.

   top

   (a) Persons operating intentional or unintentional radiators shall not be
   deemed to have any vested or recognizable right to continued use of any
   given  frequency  by  virtue of prior registration or certification of
   equipment,  or,  for power line carrier systems, on the basis of prior
   notification of use pursuant to §90.63(g) of this chapter.

   (b) Operation of an intentional, unintentional, or incidental radiator is
   subject to the conditions that no harmful interference is caused and that
   interference must be accepted that may be caused by the operation of an
   authorized radio station, by another intentional or unintentional radiator,
   by industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) equipment, or by an incidental
   radiator.

   (c) The operator of a radio frequency device shall be required to cease
   operating the device upon notification by a Commission representative that
   the device is causing harmful interference. Operation shall not resume until
   the condition causing the harmful interference has been corrected.

   (d) Intentional radiators that produce Class B emissions (damped wave) are
   prohibited.

§ 15.7   [Reserved]

   top

§ 15.9   Prohibition against eavesdropping.

   top

   Except for the operations of law enforcement officers conducted under lawful
   authority, no person shall use, either directly or indirectly, a device
   operated  pursuant  to  the provisions of this part for the purpose of
   overhearing or recording the private conversations of others unless such use
   is authorized by all of the parties engaging in the conversation.

§ 15.11   Cross reference.

   top

   The provisions of subparts A, H, I, J and K of part 2 apply to intentional
   and unintentional radiators, in addition to the provisions of this part.
   Also, a cable system terminal device and a cable input selector switch shall
   be subject to the relevant provisions of part 76 of this chapter.

§ 15.13   Incidental radiators.

   top

   Manufacturers of these devices shall employ good engineering practices to
   minimize the risk of harmful interference.

§ 15.15   General technical requirements.

   top

   (a)  An  intentional or unintentional radiator shall be constructed in
   accordance  with  good  engineering design and manufacturing practice.
   Emanations from the device shall be suppressed as much as practicable, but
   in no case shall the emanations exceed the levels specified in these rules.

   (b) Except as follows, an intentional or unintentional radiator must be
   constructed  such  that the adjustments of any control that is readily
   accessible  by or intended to be accessible to the user will not cause
   operation  of  the  device in violation of the regulations. Access BPL
   equipment  shall  comply  with the applicable standards at the control
   adjustment that is employed. The measurement report used in support of an
   application for Certification and the user instructions for Access BPL
   equipment shall clearly specify the user-or installer-control settings that
   are required for conformance with these regulations.

   (c) Parties responsible for equipment compliance should note that the limits
   specified in this part will not prevent harmful interference under all
   circumstances. Since the operators of part 15 devices are required to cease
   operation should harmful interference occur to authorized users of the radio
   frequency spectrum, the parties responsible for equipment compliance are
   encouraged   to  employ  the  minimum  field  strength  necessary  for
   communications, to provide greater attenuation of unwanted emissions than
   required by these regulations, and to advise the user as to how to resolve
   harmful interference problems (for example, see §15.105(b)).

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.17   Susceptibility to interference.

   top

   (a) Parties responsible for equipment compliance are advised to consider the
   proximity and the high power of non-Government licensed radio stations, such
   as broadcast, amateur, land mobile, and non-geostationary mobile satellite
   feeder link earth stations, and of U.S. Government radio stations, which
   could  include  high-powered  radar  systems,  when choosing operating
   frequencies  during  the design of their equipment so as to reduce the
   susceptibility  for  receiving  harmful  interference.  Information on
   non-Government use of the spectrum can be obtained by consulting the Table
   of Frequency Allocations in §2.106 of this chapter.

   (b) Information on U.S. Government operations can be obtained by contacting:
   Director,  Spectrum  Plans and Policy, National Telecommunications and
   Information Administration, Department of Commerce, Room 4096, Washington,
   DC 20230.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  62 FR 4655 , Jan. 31, 1997;  63 FR 40835 , July 31, 1998]

§ 15.19   Labelling requirements.

   top

   (a) In addition to the requirements in part 2 of this chapter, a device
   subject to certification, or verification shall be labelled as follows:

   (1) Receivers associated with the operation of a licensed radio service,
   e.g., FM broadcast under part 73 of this chapter, land mobile operation
   under part 90, etc., shall bear the following statement in a conspicuous
   location on the device:

   This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
   the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.

   (2) A stand-alone cable input selector switch, shall bear the following
   statement in a conspicuous location on the device:

   This device is verified to comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules for use with
   cable television service.

   (3) All other devices shall bear the following statement in a conspicuous
   location on the device:

   This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
   the  following  two  conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
   interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
   including interference that may cause undesired operation.

   (4) Where a device is constructed in two or more sections connected by wires
   and marketed together, the statement specified under paragraph (a) of this
   section is required to be affixed only to the main control unit.

   (5) When the device is so small or for such use that it is not practicable
   to place the statement specified under paragraph (a) of this section on it,
   the information required by this paragraph shall be placed in a prominent
   location in the instruction manual or pamphlet supplied to the user or,
   alternatively, shall be placed on the container in which the device is
   marketed.  However,  the  FCC  identifier or the unique identifier, as
   appropriate, must be displayed on the device.

   (b) Products subject to authorization under a Declaration of Conformity
   shall be labelled as follows:

   (1) The label shall be located in a conspicuous location on the device and
   shall contain the unique identification described in §2.1074 of this chapter
   and the following logo:

   (i) If the product is authorized based on testing of the product or system;
   or
   [er09de03.000.gif]

   View or download PDF

   (ii) If a personal computer is authorized based on assembly using separately
   authorized components, in accordance with §15.101(c)(2) or (c)(3), and the
   resulting product is not separately tested:
   [er09de03.001.gif]

   View or download PDF

   (2) Label text and information should be in a size of type large enough to
   be readily legible, consistent with the dimensions of the equipment and the
   label. However, the type size for the text is not required to be larger than
   eight point.

   (3) When the device is so small or for such use that it is not practicable
   to place the statement specified under paragraph (b)(1) of this section on
   it, such as for a CPU board or a plug-in circuit board peripheral device,
   the text associated with the logo may be placed in a prominent location in
   the instruction manual or pamphlet supplied to the user. However, the unique
   identification (trade name and model number) and the logo must be displayed
   on the device.

   (4) The label shall not be a stick-on, paper label. The label on these
   products shall be permanently affixed to the product and shall be readily
   visible to the purchaser at the time of purchase, as described in §2.925(d)
   of this chapter. “Permanently affixed” means that the label is etched,
   engraved, stamped, silkscreened, indelibly printed, or otherwise permanently
   marked on a permanently attached part of the equipment or on a nameplate of
   metal, plastic, or other material fastened to the equipment by welding,
   riveting, or a permanent adhesive. The label must be designed to last the
   expected lifetime of the equipment in the environment in which the equipment
   may be operated and must not be readily detachable.

   (c) [Reserved]

   (d) Consumer electronics TV receiving devices, including TV receivers,
   videocassette recorders, and similar devices, that incorporate features
   intended to be used with cable television service, but do not fully comply
   with the technical standards for cable ready equipment set forth in §15.118,
   shall not be marketed with terminology that describes the device as “cable
   ready” or “cable compatible,” or that otherwise conveys the impression that
   the device is fully compatible with cable service. Factual statements about
   the  various features of a device that are intended for use with cable
   service or the quality of such features are acceptable so long as such
   statements do not imply that the device is fully compatible with cable
   service. Statements relating to product features are generally acceptable
   where they are limited to one or more specific features of a device, rather
   than  the  device  as a whole. This requirement applies to consumer TV
   receivers, videocassette recorders and similar devices manufactured or
   imported for sale in this country on or after October 31, 1994.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994;  61 FR 18509 , Apr. 26, 1996;  61 FR 31048 , June 19, 1996;  62 FR 41881 , Aug. 4, 1997;
    63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998;  65 FR 64391 , Oct. 27, 2000;  68 FR 66733 , Nov. 28,
   2003;  68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.21   Information to user.

   top

   The users manual or instruction manual for an intentional or unintentional
   radiator shall caution the user that changes or modifications not expressly
   approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
   authority to operate the equipment. In cases where the manual is provided
   only in a form other than paper, such as on a computer disk or over the
   Internet, the information required by this section may be included in the
   manual  in  that alternative form, provided the user can reasonably be
   expected to have the capability to access information in that form.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.23   Home-built devices.

   top

   (a)  Equipment  authorization is not required for devices that are not
   marketed, are not constructed from a kit, and are built in quantities of
   five or less for personal use.

   (b) It is recognized that the individual builder of home-built equipment may
   not possess the means to perform the measurements for determining compliance
   with the regulations. In this case, the builder is expected to employ good
   engineering practices to meet the specified technical standards to the
   greatest  extent  practicable.  The  provisions of §15.5 apply to this
   equipment.

§ 15.25   Kits.

   top

   A TV interface device, including a cable system terminal device, which is
   marketed as a kit shall comply with the following requirements:

   (a)  All  parts  necessary for the assembled device to comply with the
   technical  requirements of this part must be supplied with the kit. No
   mechanism  for adjustment that can cause operation in violation of the
   requirements of this part shall be made accessible to the builder.

   (b) At least two units of the kit shall be assembled in exact accordance
   with the instructions supplied with the product to be marketed. If all
   components required to fully complete the kit (other than those specified in
   paragraph (a) of this section which are needed for compliance with the
   technical provisions and must be included with the kit) are not normally
   furnished  with  the kit, assembly shall be made using the recommended
   components. The assembled units shall be certified or authorized under the
   Declaration  of  Conformity procedure, as appropriate, pursuant to the
   requirements of this part.

   (1) The measurement data required for a TV interface device subject to
   certification shall be obtained for each of the two units and submitted with
   an application for certification pursuant to subpart J of part 2 of this
   chapter.

   (2) The measurement data required for a TV interface device subject to
   Declaration  of  Conformity shall be obtained for the units tested and
   retained on file pursuant to the provisions of subpart J of part 2 of this
   chapter.

   (c) A copy of the exact instructions that will be provided for assembly of
   the device shall be submitted with an application for certification. Those
   parts which are not normally furnished shall be detailed in the application
   for equipment authorization.

   (d) In lieu of the label required by §15.19, the following label, along with
   the label bearing the FCC identifier and other information specified in
   §§2.925 and 2.926, shall be included in the kit with instructions to the
   builder that it shall be attached to the completed kit:

   (Name of Grantee)

   (FCC Identifier)

   This device can be expected to comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules provided
   it is assembled in exact accordance with the instructions provided with this
   kit. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may
   not  cause  harmful  interference, and (2) this device must accept any
   interference  received including interference that may cause undesired
   operation.

   (e) For the purpose of this section, circuit boards used as repair parts for
   the replacement of electrically identical defective circuit boards are not
   considered to be kits.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989,as amended at  63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998]

§ 15.27   Special accessories.

   top

   (a) Equipment marketed to a consumer must be capable of complying with the
   necessary  regulations  in the configuration in which the equipment is
   marketed. Where special accessories, such as shielded cables and/or special
   connectors, are required to enable an unintentional or intentional radiator
   to comply with the emission limits in this part, the equipment must be
   marketed with, i.e., shipped and sold with, those special accessories.
   However, in lieu of shipping or packaging the special accessories with the
   unintentional or intentional radiator, the responsible party may employ
   other methods of ensuring that the special accessories are provided to the
   consumer, without additional charge, at the time of purchase. Information
   detailing any alternative method used to supply the special accessories
   shall be included in the application for a grant of equipment authorization
   or  retained  in  the  verification records, as appropriate. The party
   responsible for the equipment, as detailed in §2.909 of this chapter, shall
   ensure that these special accessories are provided with the equipment. The
   instruction manual for such devices shall include appropriate instructions
   on the first page of the text concerned with the installation of the device
   that these special accessories must be used with the device. It is the
   responsibility of the user to use the needed special accessories supplied
   with the equipment. In cases where the manual is provided only in a form
   other than paper, such as on a computer disk or over the Internet, the
   information required by this section may be included in the manual in that
   alternative form, provided the user can reasonably be expected to have the
   capability to access information in that form.

   (b) If a device requiring special accessories is installed by or under the
   supervision of the party marketing the device, it is the responsibility of
   that party to install the equipment using the special accessories. For
   equipment requiring professional installation, it is not necessary for the
   responsible party to market the special accessories with the equipment.
   However, the need to use the special accessories must be detailed in the
   instruction manual, and it is the responsibility of the installer to provide
   and to install the required accessories.

   (c)  Accessory items that can be readily obtained from multiple retail
   outlets are not considered to be special accessories and are not required to
   be marketed with the equipment. The manual included with the equipment must
   specify what additional components or accessories are required to be used in
   order to ensure compliance with this part, and it is the responsibility of
   the user to provide and use those components and accessories.

   (d) The resulting system, including any accessories or components marketed
   with the equipment, must comply with the regulations.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.29   Inspection by the Commission.

   top

   (a) Any equipment or device subject to the provisions of this part, together
   with any certificate, notice of registration or any technical data required
   to  be kept on file by the operator, supplier or party responsible for
   compliance  of  the device shall be made available for inspection by a
   Commission representative upon reasonable request.

   (b) The owner or operator of a radio frequency device subject to this part
   shall  promptly  furnish  to the Commission or its representative such
   information  as may be requested concerning the operation of the radio
   frequency device.

   (c) The party responsible for the compliance of any device subject to this
   part shall promptly furnish to the Commission or its representatives such
   information as may be requested concerning the operation of the device,
   including  a  copy of any measurements made for obtaining an equipment
   authorization or demonstrating compliance with the regulations.

   (d) The Commission, from time to time, may request the party responsible for
   compliance,  including an importer, to submit to the FCC Laboratory in
   Columbia,  Maryland, various equipment to determine that the equipment
   continues to comply with the applicable standards. Shipping costs to the
   Commission's Laboratory and return shall be borne by the responsible party.
   Testing  by  the  Commission  will  be performed using the measurement
   procedure(s) that was in effect at the time the equipment was authorized or
   verified.

§ 15.31   Measurement standards.

   top

   (a) The following measurement procedures are used by the Commission to
   determine compliance with the technical requirements in this part. Except
   where noted, copies of these procedures are available from the Commission's
   current duplicating contractor whose name and address are available from the
   Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau at 1–888–CALL-FCC
   (1–888–225–5322).

   (1) FCC/OET MP–2: Measurement of UHF Noise Figures of TV Receivers.

   (2) Unlicensed Personal Communication Service (UPCS) devices are to be
   measured for compliance using ANSI C63.17–1998: “Methods of Measurement of
   the Electromagnetic and Operational Compatibility of Unlicensed Personal
   Communications Services (UPCS) Devices”, (incorporated by reference, see
   §15.38). This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the
   Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.

   (3) Other intentional and unintentional radiators are to be measured for
   compliance using the following procedure excluding sections 4.1.5.2, 5.7, 9
   and 14: ANSI C63.4–2003: “Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise Emissions
   from Low-Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz
   to 40 GHz” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38). This incorporation by
   reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance
   with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.

   Note to paragraph(a)(3): Digital devices tested to show compliance with the
   provisions of §§15.107(e) and 15.109(g) must be tested following the ANSI
   C63.4 procedure described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.

   (b) All parties making compliance measurements on equipment subject to the
   requirements of this part are urged to use these measurement procedures. Any
   party using other procedures should ensure that such other procedures can be
   relied on to produce measurement results compatible with the FCC measurement
   procedures. The description of the measurement procedure used in testing the
   equipment for compliance and a list of the test equipment actually employed
   shall be made part of an application for certification or included with the
   data required to be retained by the party responsible for devices authorized
   pursuant to a Declaration of Conformity or devices subject to verification.

   (c) For swept frequency equipment, measurements shall be made with the
   frequency sweep stopped at those frequencies chosen for the measurements to
   be reported.

   (d) Field strength measurements shall be made, to the extent possible, on an
   open field site. Test sites other than open field sites may be employed if
   they are properly calibrated so that the measurement results correspond to
   what would be obtained from an open field site. In the case of equipment for
   which measurements can be performed only at the installation site, such as
   perimeter protection systems, carrier current systems, and systems employing
   a “leaky” coaxial cable as an antenna, measurements for verification or for
   obtaining a grant of equipment authorization shall be performed at a minimum
   of three installations that can be demonstrated to be representative of
   typical installation sites.

   (e) For intentional radiators, measurements of the variation of the input
   power or the radiated signal level of the fundamental frequency component of
   the emission, as appropriate, shall be performed with the supply voltage
   varied between 85% and 115% of the nominal rated supply voltage. For battery
   operated equipment, the equipment tests shall be performed using a new
   battery.

   (f) To the extent practicable, the device under test shall be measured at
   the  distance  specified in the appropriate rule section. The distance
   specified corresponds to the horizontal distance between the measurement
   antenna and the closest point of the equipment under test, support equipment
   or  interconnecting cables as determined by the boundary defined by an
   imaginary  straight  line  periphery  describing  a  simple  geometric
   configuration enclosing the system containing the equipment under test. The
   equipment under test, support equipment and any interconnecting cables shall
   be included within this boundary.

   (1) At frequencies at or above 30 MHz, measurements may be performed at a
   distance other than what is specified provided: measurements are not made in
   the near field except where it can be shown that near field measurements are
   appropriate  due  to  the characteristics of the device; and it can be
   demonstrated that the signal levels needed to be measured at the distance
   employed can be detected by the measurement equipment. Measurements shall
   not be performed at a distance greater than 30 meters unless it can be
   further demonstrated that measurements at a distance of 30 meters or less
   are impractical. When performing measurements at a distance other than that
   specified, the results shall be extrapolated to the specified distance using
   an extrapolation factor of 20 dB/decade (inverse linear-distance for field
   strength measurements; inverse-linear-distance-squared for power density
   measurements).

   (2) At frequencies below 30 MHz, measurements may be performed at a distance
   closer than that specified in the regulations; however, an attempt should be
   made to avoid making measurements in the near field. Pending the development
   of an appropriate measurement procedure for measurements performed below 30
   MHz, when performing measurements at a closer distance than specified, the
   results shall be extrapolated to the specified distance by either making
   measurements  at  a minimum of two distances on at least one radial to
   determine the proper extrapolation factor or by using the square of an
   inverse linear distance extrapolation factor (40 dB/decade).

   (3)  The  applicant  for  a  grant  of certification shall specify the
   extrapolation method used in the application filed with the Commission. For
   equipment  subject  to Declaration of Conformity or verification, this
   information shall be retained with the measurement data.

   (4) When measurement distances of 30 meters or less are specified in the
   regulations,  the  Commission  will test the equipment at the distance
   specified unless measurement at that distance results in measurements being
   performed in the near field. When measurement distances of greater than 30
   meters  are specified in the regulations, the Commission will test the
   equipment  at  a closer distance, usually 30 meters, extrapolating the
   measured field strength to the specified distance using the methods shown in
   this section.

   (5) Measurements shall be performed at a sufficient number of radials around
   the equipment under test to determine the radial at which the field strength
   values of the radiated emissions are maximized. The maximum field strength
   at  the  frequency  being  measured shall be reported in the equipment
   authorization report. This paragraph shall not apply to Access BPL equipment
   on  overhead  medium  voltage  lines. In lieu thereof, the measurement
   guidelines established by the Commission for Access BPL shall be followed.

   (g) Equipment under test shall be adjusted, using those controls that are
   readily accessible to or are intended to be accessible to the consumer, in
   such a manner as to maximize the level of the emissions. For those devices
   to  which  wire  leads may be attached by the consumer, tests shall be
   performed with wire leads attached. The wire leads shall be of the length to
   be used with the equipment if that length is known. Otherwise, wire leads
   one meter in length shall be attached to the equipment. Longer wire leads
   may be employed if necessary to interconnect to associated peripherals.

   (h) For a composite system that incorporates devices contained either in a
   single enclosure or in separate enclosures connected by wire or cable,
   testing for compliance with the standards in this part shall be performed
   with  all  of the devices in the system functioning. If an intentional
   radiator incorporates more than one antenna or other radiating source and
   these radiating sources are designed to emit at the same time, measurements
   of conducted and radiated emissions shall be performed with all radiating
   sources that are to be employed emitting. A device which incorporates a
   carrier current system shall be tested as if the carrier current system were
   incorporated in a separate device; that is, the device shall be tested for
   compliance with whatever rules would apply to the device were the carrier
   current system not incorporated, and the carrier current system shall be
   tested for compliance with the rules applicable to carrier current systems.

   (i)  If  the device under test provides for the connection of external
   accessories, including external electrical input signals, the device shall
   be tested with the accessories attached. The device under test shall be
   fully exercised with these external accessories. The emission tests shall be
   performed with the device and accessories configured in a manner that tends
   to produce maximized emissions within the range of variations that can be
   expected  under  normal  operating conditions. In the case of multiple
   accessory external ports, an external accessory shall be connected to one of
   each type of port. Only one test using peripherals or external accessories
   that  are representative of the devices that will be employed with the
   equipment under test is required. All possible equipment combinations do not
   need to be tested. The accessories or peripherals connected to the device
   being tested shall be unmodified, commercially available equipment.

   (j) If the equipment under test consists of a central control unit and an
   external or internal accessory(ies) (peripheral) and the party verifying the
   equipment or applying for a grant of equipment authorization manufactures or
   assembles the central control unit and at least one of the accessory devices
   that can be used with that control unit, testing of the control unit and/or
   the accessory(ies) must be performed using the devices manufactured or
   assembled by that party, in addition to any other needed devices which the
   party does not manufacture or assemble. If the party verifying the equipment
   or applying for a grant of equipment authorization does not manufacture or
   assemble the central control unit and at least one of the accessory devices
   that can be used with that control unit or the party can demonstrate that
   the central control unit or accessory(ies) normally would be marketed or
   used with equipment from a different entity, testing of the central control
   unit  and/or  the  accessory(ies) must be performed using the specific
   combination of equipment which is intended to be marketed or used together.
   Only one test using peripherals or accessories that are representatve of the
   devices that will be employed with the equipment under test is required. All
   possible  equipment  combinations  are  not required to be tested. The
   accessories or peripherals connected to the device being tested shall be
   unmodified, commercially available equipment.

   (k) A composite system is a system that incorporates different devices
   contained either in a single enclosure or in separate enclosures connected
   by  wire or cable. If the individual devices in a composite system are
   subject to different technical standards, each such device must comply with
   its  specific standards. In no event may the measured emissions of the
   composite  system exceed the highest level permitted for an individual
   component. For digital devices which consist of a combination of Class A and
   Class B devices, the total combination of which results in a Class A digital
   device, it is only necessary to demonstrate that the equipment combination
   complies with the limits for a Class A device. This equipment combination
   may not be employed for obtaining a grant of equipment authorization or
   verifying  a  Class  B  digital device. However, if the digital device
   combination consists of a Class B central control unit, e.g., a personal
   computer, and a Class A internal peripheral(s), it must be demonstrated that
   the Class B central control unit continues to comply with the limits for a
   Class B digital device with the Class A internal peripheral(s) installed but
   not active.

   (l)  Measurements of radio frequency emissions conducted to the public
   utility power lines shall be performed using a 50 ohm/50 uH line-impedance
   stabilization network (LISN).

   Note: Receivers tested under the transition provisions contained in §15.37
   may be tested with a 50 ohm/5 μH LISN.

   (m)  Measurements on intentional radiators or receivers, other than TV
   broadcast receivers, shall be performed and, if required, reported for each
   band in which the device can be operated with the device operating at the
   number of frequencies in each band specified in the following table:
   Frequency range over which device operates Number of frequencies Location in
   the range of operation
   1 MHz or less 1 Middle.
   1 to 10 MHz 2 1 near top and 1 near bottom.
   More than 10 MHz 3 1 near top, 1 near middle and 1 near bottom.

   (n) Measurements on TV broadcast receivers shall be performed with the
   receiver tuned to each VHF frequency and also shall include the following
   oscillator frequencies: 520, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900 and 931
   MHz.  If  measurements cannot be made on one or more of the latter UHF
   frequencies because of the presence of signals from licensed radio stations
   or for other reasons to be detailed in the measurement report, measurements
   shall be made with the receiver oscillator at a nearby frequency. If the
   receiver  is  not  capable  of  receiving  channels above 806 MHz, the
   measurements employing the oscillator frequencies 900 and 931 MHz may be
   omitted.

   (o) The amplitude of spurious emissions from intentional radiators and
   emissions from unintentional radiators which are attenuated more than 20 dB
   below  the  permissible value need not be reported unless specifically
   required elsewhere in this part.

   (p) In those cases where the provisions in this section conflict with the
   measurement procedures in paragraph (a) of this section and the procedures
   were  implemented after June 23, 1989, the provisions contained in the
   measurement procedures shall take precedence.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  56 FR 13083 , Mar. 29, 1991;  57 FR 24990 , June 12, 1992;  57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992;  58 FR 37430 , July 12,
   1993;  58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993;  61 FR 14502 , Apr. 2, 1996;  62 FR 41881 ,
   Aug. 4, 1997;  62 FR 45333 , Aug. 27, 1997;  63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998;  63 FR 42278 , Aug. 7, 1998;  65 FR 58466 , Sept. 29, 2000;  68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003;
    69 FR 54034 , Sept. 7, 2004;  70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.32   Test procedures for CPU boards and computer power supplies.

   top

   Power supplies and CPU boards used with personal computers and for which
   separate authorizations are required to be obtained shall be tested as
   follows:

   (a) CPU boards shall be tested as follows:

   (1) Testing for radiated emissions shall be performed with the CPU board
   installed in a typical enclosure but with the enclosure's cover removed so
   that the internal circuitry is exposed at the top and on at least two sides.
   Additional components, including a power supply, peripheral devices, and
   subassemblies, shall be added, as needed, to result in a complete personal
   computer system. If the oscillator and the microprocessor circuits are
   contained  on  separate  circuit  boards,  both boards, typical of the
   combination that would normally be employed, must be used in the test.
   Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31.

   (i) Under these test conditions, the system under test shall not exceed the
   radiated emission limits specified in §15.109 by more than 6 dB. Emissions
   greater than 6 dB that can be identified and documented to originate from a
   component(s) other than the CPU board being tested, may be dismissed.

   (ii) Unless the test in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section demonstrates
   compliance with the limits in §15.109, a second test shall be performed
   using the same configuration described above but with the cover installed on
   the enclosure. Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified
   in §15.31. Under these test conditions, the system under test shall not
   exceed the radiated emission limits specified in §15.109.

   (2) In lieu of the procedure in (a)(1) of this section, CPU boards may be
   tested  to  demonstrate  compliance with the limits in §15.109 using a
   specified enclosure with the cover installed. Testing for radiated emissions
   shall  be  performed  with the CPU board installed in a typical system
   configuration. Additional components, including a power supply, peripheral
   devices,  and subassemblies, shall be added, as needed, to result in a
   complete personal computer system. If the oscillator and the microprocessor
   circuits are contained on separate circuit boards, both boards, typical of
   the combination that would normally be employed, must be used in the test.
   Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31.
   Under this procedure, CPU boards that comply with the limits in §15.109 must
   be marketed together with the specific enclosure used for the test.

   (3) The test demonstrating compliance with the AC power line conducted
   limits  specified in §15.107 shall be performed in accordance with the
   procedures specified in §15.31 using an enclosure, peripherals, power supply
   and subassemblies that are typical of the type with which the CPU board
   under test would normally be employed.

   (b) The power supply shall be tested installed in an enclosure that is
   typical of the type within which it would normally be installed. Additional
   components, including peripheral devices, a CPU board, and subassemblies,
   shall be added, as needed, to result in a complete personal computer system.
   Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31 and
   must demonstrate compliance with all of the standards contained in this
   part.

   [ 61 FR 31048 , June 19, 1996, as amended at  62 FR 41881 , Aug. 4, 1997]

§ 15.33   Frequency range of radiated measurements.

   top

   (a) For an intentional radiator, the spectrum shall be investigated from the
   lowest radio frequency signal generated in the device, without going below 9
   kHz, up to at least the frequency shown in this paragraph:

   (1) If the intentional radiator operates below 10 GHz: to the tenth harmonic
   of the highest fundamental frequency or to 40 GHz, whichever is lower.

   (2) If the intentional radiator operates at or above 10 GHz and below 30
   GHz: to the fifth harmonic of the highest fundamental frequency or to 100
   GHz, whichever is lower.

   (3) If the intentional radiator operates at or above 30 GHz: to the fifth
   harmonic of the highest fundamental frequency or to 200 GHz, whichever is
   lower, unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the rules.

   (4) If the intentional radiator contains a digital device, regardless of
   whether  this digital device controls the functions of the intentional
   radiator or the digital device is used for additional control or function
   purposes other than to enable the operation of the intentional radiator, the
   frequency  range  shall  be  investigated up to the range specified in
   paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section or the range applicable to
   the digital device, as shown in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, whichever
   is the higher frequency range of investigation.

   (b) For unintentional radiators:

   (1) Except as otherwise indicated in paragraphs (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this
   section, for an unintentional radiator, including a digital device, the
   spectrum  shall be investigated from the lowest radio frequency signal
   generated or used in the device, without going below the lowest frequency
   for which a radiated emission limit is specified, up to the frequency shown
   in the following table:
   Highest frequency generated or used in the device or on which the device
   operates or tunes (MHz) Upper frequency of measurement range (MHz)
   Below 1.705 30.
   1.705–108 1000.
   108–500 2000.
   500–1000 5000.
   Above 1000 5th harmonic of the highest frequency or 40 GHz, whichever is
   lower.

   (2) A unintentional radiator, excluding a digital device, in which the
   highest frequency generated in the device, the highest frequency used in the
   device and the highest frequency on which the device operates or tunes are
   less than 30 MHz and which, in accordance with §15.109, is required to
   comply  with  standards  on the level of radiated emissions within the
   frequency range 9 kHz to 30 MHz, such as a CB receiver or a device designed
   to conduct its radio frequency emissions via connecting wires or cables,
   e.g.,  a  carrier  current  system  not  intended to radiate, shall be
   investigated  from the lowest radio frequency generated or used in the
   device, without going below 9 kHz (25 MHz for CB receivers), up to the
   frequency  shown in the following table. If the unintentional radiator
   contains a digital device, the upper frequency to be investigated shall be
   that shown in the table below or in the table in paragraph (b)(1) of this
   section, as based on both the highest frequency generated and the highest
   frequency used in the digital device, whichever range is higher.
   Highest frequency generated or used in the device or on which the device
   operates or tunes (MHz) Upper frequency of measurement range (MHz)
   Below 1.705 30
   1.705–10 400
   10–30 500

   (3)  Except  for  a  CB receiver, a receiver employing superheterodyne
   techniques shall be investigated from 30 MHz up to at least the second
   harmonic of the highest local oscillator frequency generated in the device.
   If such receiver is controlled by a digital device, the frequency range
   shall be investigated up to the higher of the second harmonic of the highest
   local oscillator frequency generated in the device or the upper frequency of
   the measurement range specified for the digital device in paragraph (b)(1)
   of this section.

   (c)  The above specified frequency ranges of measurements apply to the
   measurement  of  radiated emissions and, in the case of receivers, the
   measurement to demonstrate compliance with the antenna conduction limits
   specified in §15.111. The frequency range of measurements for AC power line
   conducted limits is specified in §§15.107 and 15.207 and applies to all
   equipment subject to those regulations. In some cases, depending on the
   frequency(ies) generated and used by the equipment, only signals conducted
   onto the AC power lines are required to be measured.

   (d) Particular attention should be paid to harmonics and subharmonics of the
   fundamental frequency as well as to those frequencies removed from the
   fundamental by multiples of the oscillator frequency. Radiation at the
   frequencies of multiplier states should also be checked.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  61 FR 14502 , Apr. 2, 1996;  63 FR 42278 , Aug. 7, 1998]

§ 15.35   Measurement detector functions and bandwidths.

   top

   The conducted and radiated emission limits shown in this part are based on
   the following, unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this part:

   (a) On any frequency or frequencies below or equal to 1000 MHz, the limits
   shown are based on measuring equipment employing a CISPR quasi-peak detector
   function and related measurement bandwidths, unless otherwise specified. The
   specifications for the measuring instrument using the CISPR quasi-peak
   detector  can  be found in Publication 16 of the International Special
   Committee   on   Radio   Interference  (CISPR)  of  the  International
   Electrotechnical  Commission.  As  an  alternative to CISPR quasi-peak
   measurements,  the  responsible  party, at its option, may demonstrate
   compliance with the emission limits using measuring equipment employing a
   peak  detector  function,  properly adjusted for such factors as pulse
   desensitization, as long as the same bandwidths as indicated for CISPR
   quasi-peak measurements are employed.

   Note: For pulse modulated devices with a pulse-repetition frequency of 20 Hz
   or  less  and  for  which CISPR quasi-peak measurements are specified,
   compliance  with the regulations shall be demonstrated using measuring
   equipment employing a peak detector function, properly adjusted for such
   factors as pulse desensitization, using the same measurement bandwidths that
   are indicated for CISPR quasi-peak measurements.

   (b) Unless otherwise specified, on any frequency or frequencies above 1000
   MHz,  the radiated emission limits are based on the use of measurement
   instrumentation employing an average detector function. Unless otherwise
   specified, measurements above 1000 MHz shall be performed using a minimum
   resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz. When average radiated emission measurements
   are specified in this part, including average emission measurements below
   1000 MHz, there also is a limit on the peak level of the radio frequency
   emissions. Unless otherwise specified, e.g. , see §§15.250, 15.252, 15.255,
   and 15.50915.519, the limit on peak radio frequency emissions is 20 dB
   above  the  maximum permitted average emission limit applicable to the
   equipment under test. This peak limit applies to the total peak emission
   level radiated by the device, e.g. , the total peak power level. Note that
   the  use of a pulse desensitization correction factor may be needed to
   determine  the  total  peak  emission level. The instruction manual or
   application note for the measurement instrument should be consulted for
   determining pulse desensitization factors, as necessary.

   (c) Unless otherwise specified, e.g. §15.255(b), when the radiated emission
   limits are expressed in terms of the average value of the emission, and
   pulsed  operation is employed, the measurement field strength shall be
   determined by averaging over one complete pulse train, including blanking
   intervals, as long as the pulse train does not exceed 0.1 seconds. As an
   alternative (provided the transmitter operates for longer than 0.1 seconds)
   or in cases where the pulse train exceeds 0.1 seconds, the measured field
   strength shall be determined from the average absolute voltage during a 0.1
   second interval during which the field strength is at its maximum value. The
   exact method of calculating the average field strength shall be submitted
   with  any  application  for  certification or shall be retained in the
   measurement data file for equipment subject to notification or verification.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  56 FR 13083 , Mar. 29, 1991;  61 FR 14502 , Apr. 2, 1996;  63 FR 42279 , Aug. 7, 1998;  67 FR 34855 , May 16, 2002;
    70 FR 6773 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.37   Transition provisions for compliance with the rules.

   top

   Equipment may be authorized, manufactured and imported under the rules in
   effect prior to June 23, 1989, in accordance with the following schedules:

   (a) For all intentional and unintentional radiators, except for receivers:
   Radio frequency equipment verified by the responsible party or for which an
   application for a grant of equipment authorization is submitted to the
   Commission on or after June 23, 1992, shall comply with the regulations
   specified in this part. Radio frequency equipment that is manufactured or
   imported  on or after June 23, 1994, shall comply with the regulations
   specified in this part.

   (b) For receivers: Receivers subject to the regulations in this part that
   are manufactured or imported on or after June 23, 1999, shall comply with
   the regulations specified in this part. However, if a receiver is associated
   with a transmitter that could not have been authorized under the regulations
   in effect prior to June 23, 1989, e.g., a transmitter operating under the
   provisions of §15.209 or §15.249 (below 960 MHz), the transition provisions
   in  this  section  do  not  apply. Such receivers must comply with the
   regulations  in  this  part. In addition, receivers are subject to the
   provisions in paragraph (f) of this section.

   (c) There are no restrictions on the operation or marketing of equipment
   complying with the regulations in effect prior to June 23, 1989.

   (d)  Prior  to  May  25,  1991, person shall import, market or operate
   intentional radiators within the band 902–905 MHz under the provisions of
   §15.249. Until that date, the Commission will not issue a grant of equipment
   authorization for equipment operating under §15.249 if the equipment is
   designed to permit operation within the band 902–905 MHz.

   (e) For cordless telephones: The manufacture and importation of cordless
   telephones not complying with §15.214(d) of this part shall cease on or
   before September 11, 1991. These provisions will not apply to cordless
   telephones which are repaired or refurbished, or re-imported after repair or
   refurbishment.  Applications for a grant of equipment authorization of
   cordless telephones not complying with §15.214(d) of this part will not be
   accepted by the Commission after May 10, 1991. Cordless telephones that have
   previously received equipment authorization and that, without modification,
   already comply with the requirements of §15.214(d) of this part, need not be
   reauthorized.

   (f) The manufacture or importation of scanning receivers, and frequency
   converters designed or marketed for use with scanning receivers, that do not
   comply with the provisions of §15.121(a)(1) shall cease on or before April
   26, 1994. Effective April 26, 1993, the Commission will not grant equipment
   authorization  for receivers that do not comply with the provisions of
   §15.121(a)(1). These rules do not prohibit the sale or use of authorized
   receivers manufactured in the United States, or imported into the United
   States, prior to April 26, 1994.

   (g) For CPU boards and power supplies designed to be used with personal
   computers: The manufacture and importation of these products shall cease on
   or before June 19, 1997 unless these products have been authorized under a
   Declaration  of  Conformity or a grant of certification, demonstrating
   compliance with all of the provisions in this part. Limited provisions, as
   detailed  in  §15.101(d),  are  provided to permit the importation and
   manufacture of these products subsequent to this date where the CPU boards
   and/or power supplies are marketed only to personal computer equipment
   manufacturers.

   (h) The manufacture or importation of scanning receivers, and frequency
   converters designed or marketed for use with scanning receivers, that do not
   comply with the provisions of §15.121 shall cease on or before October 25,
   1999.  Effective July 26, 1999 the Commission will not grant equipment
   authorization  for receivers that do not comply with the provisions of
   §15.121. This paragraph does not prohibit the sale or use of authorized
   receivers manufactured in the United States, or imported into the United
   States, prior to October 25, 1999.

   (i) Effective October 16, 2002, an equipment approval may no longer be
   obtained for medical telemetry equipment operating under the provisions of
   §15.241 or §15.242. The requirements for obtaining an approval for medical
   telemetry equipment after this date are found in Subpart H of Part 95 of
   this chapter.

   (j) All radio frequency devices that are authorized under the certification,
   verification or declaration of conformity procedures on or after July 12,
   2004 shall comply with the conducted limits specified in §15.107 or §15.207
   as  appropriate.  All radio frequency devices that are manufactured or
   imported on or after July 11, 2005 shall comply with the conducted limits
   specified in §15.107 or §15.207, as appropriate. Equipment authorized,
   imported  or  manufactured  prior to these dates shall comply with the
   conducted limits specified in §15.107 or §15.207, as appropriate, or with
   the conducted limits that were in effect immediately prior to September 9,
   2002.

   (k) Radar detectors manufactured or imported after August 28, 2002 and
   marketed  after  September  27, 2002 shall comply with the regulations
   specified in this part. Radar detectors manufactured or imported prior to
   January 27, 2003 may be labeled with the information required by §§2.925 and
   15.19(a) of this chapter on the individual equipment carton rather than on
   the device, and are exempt from complying with the requirements of §15.21.

   (l)  U–NII  equipment  operating  in  the 5.25–5.35 GHz band for which
   applications for certification are filed on or after July 20, 2006 shall
   comply  with  the DFS and TPC requirements specified in §15.407. U–NII
   equipment operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band that are imported or marketed
   on or after July 20, 2007 shall comply with the DFS and TPC requirements in
   §15.407.

   (m) All Access BPL devices that are manufactured, imported, marketed or
   installed on or after July 7, 2006, shall comply with the requirements
   specified  in  subpart  G of this part, including certification of the
   equipment.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32339 , Aug. 7, 1989;  55 FR 25095 , June
   20, 1990;  56 FR 3785 , Jan. 31, 1991;  58 FR 25575 , Apr. 27, 1993;  61 FR 31049 , June 19, 1996;  64 FR 22561 , Apr. 27, 1999;  65 FR 44008 , July 17,
   2000;  67 FR 45670 , July 10, 2002;  67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002;  69 FR 2686 ,
   Jan. 20, 2004;  70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005;  70 FR 17329 , Apr. 6, 2005;  71 FR 11540 , Mar. 8, 2006]

§ 15.38   Incorporation by reference.

   top

   (a) The materials listed in this section are incorporated by reference in
   this part. These incorporations by reference were approved by the Director
   of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part
   51.  These materials are incorporated as they exist on the date of the
   approval, and notice of any change in these materials will be published in
   theFederal  Register.The  materials  are available for purchase at the
   corresponding addresses as noted, and all are available for inspection at
   the  Federal  Communications Commission, 445 12th. St., SW., Reference
   Information Center, Room CY-A257, Washington, DC 20554, and at the National
   Archives  and  Records  Administration  (NARA). For information on the
   availability  of  this  material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to:
   http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_loc
   ations.html .

   (b) The following materials are available for purchase from at least one of
   the following addresses: Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way
   East, Englewood, CO 80112 or at http://global.ihs.com; or American National
   Standards Institute, 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036 or
   at http://webstore.ansi.org/ansidocstore/default.asp; or Society of Cable
   Telecommunications Engineers at http://www.scte.org/standards/index.cfm. 

   (1) SCTE 28 2003 (formerly DVS 295): “Host-POD Interface Standard,” 2003,
   IBR approved for §15.123.

   (2) SCTE 41 2003 (formerly DVS 301): “POD Copy Protection System,” 2003, IBR
   approved for §15.123.

   (3) ANSI/SCTE 54 2003 (formerly DVS 241): “Digital Video Service Multiplex
   and Transport System Standard for Cable Television,” 2003, IBR approved for
   §15.123.

   (4) ANSI/SCTE 65 2002 (formerly DVS 234): “Service Information Delivered
   Out-of-Band for Digital Cable Television,” 2002, IBR approved for §15.123.

   (5)  SCTE 40 2003 (formerly DVS 313): “Digital Cable Network Interface
   Standard,” 2003, IBR approved for §15.123.

   (6) ANSI C63.4–2003: “Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise Emissions from
   Low-Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz to 40
   GHz,” 2003, IBR approved for §15.31, except for sections 4.1, 5.2, 5.7, 9
   and 14.

   (7)  CEA–542–B: “CEA Standard: Cable Television Channel Identification
   Plan,” July 2003, IBR approved for §15.118.

   (8) EIA–608: “Recommended Practice for Line 21 Data Service,” 1994, IBR
   approved for §15.120.

   (9) EIA–744: “Transport of Content Advisory Information Using Extended Data
   Service (XDS),” 1997, IBR approved for §15.120.

   (10) EIA–708–B: “Digital Television (DTV) Closed Captioning,” 1999, IBR
   approved for §15.122.

   (11)  Third  Edition  of  the International Special Committee on Radio
   Interference (CISPR), Pub. 22, “Information Technology Equipment—Radio
   Disturbance Characteristics—Limits and Methods of Measurement,” 1997, IBR
   approved for §15.109.

   (12) ANSI C63.17–1998: “Methods of Measurement of the Electromagnetic and
   Operational Compatibility of Unlicensed Personal Communications Services
   (UPCS) Devices”, 1998, IBR approved for §15.31.

   (13) CEA–766–A: “U.S. and Canadian Region Rating Tables (RRT) and Content
   Advisory Descriptors for Transport of Content Advisory Information using
   ATSC A/65–A Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP),” April 2001, IBR
   approved for §15.120.

   (c) The following materials are freely available from at least one of the
   following addresses: Consumer Electronics Association, 2500 Wilson Blvd.,
   Arlington,   VA   22201   or   at   http://www.ce.org/publicpolicy   :
   Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance
   Checklist: PICS Proforma,” 2003, IBR approved for §15.123.

   [ 68 FR 66732 , Nov. 28, 2003, as amended at  68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003;  69 FR 18803 , Apr. 9, 2004;  69 FR 54034 , Sept. 7, 2004;  69 FR 59534 , Oct. 4, 2004;
    69 FR 57861 , Sept. 28, 2004]

Subpart B—Unintentional Radiators

   top

§ 15.101   Equipment authorization of unintentional radiators.

   top

   (a)  Except  as  otherwise  exempted  in  §§15.23, 15.103, and 15.113,
   unintentional radiators shall be authorized prior to the initiation of
   marketing, as follows:
   Type of device Equipment authorization required
   TV broadcast receiver Verification.
   FM broadcast receiver Verification.
   CB receiver Declaration of Conformity or Certification.
   Superregenerative receiver Declaration of Conformity or Certification.
   Scanning receiver Certification.
   Radar detector Certification.
   All  other  receivers  subject to part 15 Declaration of Conformity or
   Certification.
   TV interface device Declaration of Conformity or Certification.
   Cable system terminal device Declaration of Conformity.
   Stand-alone cable input selector switch Verification.
   Class B personal computers and peripherals Declaration of Conformity or
   Certification.^1
   CPU boards and internal power supplies used with Class B personal computers
   Declaration of Conformity or Certification.^1
   Class B personal computers assembled using authorized CPU boards or power
   supplies Declaration of Conformity.
   Class B external switching power supplies Verification.
   Other Class B digital devices & peripherals Verification.
   Class A digital devices, peripherals & external switching power supplies
   Verification.
   Access Broadband over Power Line (Access BPL) Certification.
   All other devices Verification.

   (b) Only those receivers that operate (tune) within the frequency range of
   30–960  MHz,  CB  receivers  and  radar  detectors  are subject to the
   authorizations shown in paragraph (a) of this section. However, receivers
   indicated as being subject to Declaration of Conformity that are contained
   within  a  transceiver, the transmitter portion of which is subject to
   certification,  shall  be authorized under the verification procedure.
   Receivers  operating  above  960 MHz or below 30 MHz, except for radar
   detectors and CB receivers, are exempt from complying with the technical
   provisions of this part but are subject to §15.5.

   (c) Personal computers shall be authorized in accordance with one of the
   following methods:

   (1) The specific combination of CPU board, power supply and enclosure is
   tested together and authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or a grant
   of certification;

   (2) The personal computer is authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or
   a grant of certification, and the CPU board or power supply in that computer
   is  replaced with a CPU board or power supply that has been separately
   authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or a grant of certification; or

   (3)  The CPU board and power supply used in the assembly of a personal
   computer have been separately authorized under a Declaration of Conformity
   or a grant of certification; and

   (4) Personal computers assembled using either of the methods specified in
   paragraphs (c)(2) or (c)(3) of this section must, by themselves, also be
   authorized under a Declaration of Conformity if they are marketed. However,
   additional testing is not required for this Declaration of Conformity,
   provided the procedures in §15.102(b) are followed.

   (d) Peripheral devices, as defined in §15.3(r), shall be authorized under a
   Declaration of Conformity, or a grant of certification, or verified, as
   appropriate, prior to marketing. Regardless of the provisions of paragraphs
   (a) or (c) of this section, if a CPU board, power supply, or peripheral
   device will always be marketed with a specific personal computer, it is not
   necessary to obtain a separate authorization for that product provided the
   specific combination of personal computer, peripheral device, CPU board and
   power supply has been authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or a
   grant of certification as a personal computer.

   (1) No authorization is required for a peripheral device or a subassembly
   that is sold to an equipment manufacturer for further fabrication; that
   manufacturer is responsible for obtaining the necessary authorization prior
   to further marketing to a vendor or to a user.

   (2) Power supplies and CPU boards that have not been separately authorized
   and  are  designed for use with personal computers may be imported and
   marketed  only  to a personal computer equipment manufacturer that has
   indicated, in writing, to the seller or importer that they will obtain a
   Declaration of Conformity or a grant of certification for the personal
   computer employing these components.

   (e)  Subassemblies to digital devices are not subject to the technical
   standards in this part unless they are marketed as part of a system in which
   case the resulting system must comply with the applicable regulations.
   Subassemblies include:

   (1)  Devices that are enclosed solely within the enclosure housing the
   digital device, except for: power supplies used in personal computers;
   devices included under the definition of a peripheral device in §15.3(r);
   and personal computer CPU boards, as defined in §15.3(bb);

   (2) CPU boards, as defined in §15.3(bb), other than those used in personal
   computers, that are marketed without an enclosure or power supply; and

   (3) Switching power supplies that are separately marketed and are solely for
   use internal to a device other than a personal computer.

   (f) The procedures for obtaining a grant of certification or notification
   and  for verification and a Declaration of Conformity are contained in
   subpart J of part 2 of this chapter.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  61 FR 31050 , June 19, 1996;  63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998;  64 FR 4997 , Feb. 2, 1999;  67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002;
    70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.102   CPU boards and power supplies used in personal computers.

   top

   (a) Authorized CPU boards and power supplies that are sold as separate
   components shall be supplied with complete installation instructions. These
   instructions shall specify all of the installation procedures that must be
   followed to ensure compliance with the standards, including, if necessary,
   the type of enclosure, e.g., a metal enclosure, proper grounding techniques,
   the use of shielded cables, the addition of any needed components, and any
   necessary modifications to additional components.

   (1) Any additional parts needed to ensure compliance with the standards,
   except for the enclosure, are considered to be special accessories and, in
   accordance with §15.27, must be marketed with the CPU board or power supply.

   (2) Any modifications that must be made to a personal computer, peripheral
   device, CPU board or power supply during installation of a CPU board or
   power supply must be simple enough that they can be performed by the average
   consumer. Parts requiring soldering, disassembly of circuitry or other
   similar modifications are not permitted.

   (b) Assemblers of personal computer systems employing modular CPU boards
   and/or power supplies are not required to test the resulting system provided
   the following conditions are met:

   (1) Each device used in the system has been authorized as required under
   this part (according to §15.101(e), some subassemblies used in a personal
   computer system may not require an authorization);

   (2) The original label and identification on each piece of equipment remain
   unchanged;

   (3) Each responsible party's instructions to ensure compliance (including,
   if  necessary,  the  use  of  shielded  cables or other accessories or
   modifications) are followed when the system is assembled;

   (4)  If the system is marketed, the resulting equipment combination is
   authorized under a Declaration of Conformity pursuant to §15.101(c)(4) and a
   compliance information statement, as described in §2.1077(b), is supplied
   with the system. Marketed systems shall also comply with the labelling
   requirements in §15.19 and must be supplied with the information required
   under §§15.21, 15.27 and 15.105; and

   (5) The assembler of a personal computer system may be required to test the
   system and/or make necessary modifications if a system is found to cause
   harmful interference or to be noncompliant with the appropriate standards in
   the configuration in which it is marketed (see §§2.909, 15.1, 15.27(d) and
   15.101(e)).

   [ 61 FR 31050 , June 19, 1996]

§ 15.103   Exempted devices.

   top

   The  following  devices  are subject only to the general conditions of
   operation in §§15.5 and 15.29 and are exempt from the specific technical
   standards and other requirements contained in this part. The operator of the
   exempted  device shall be required to stop operating the device upon a
   finding by the Commission or its representative that the device is causing
   harmful interference. Operation shall not resume until the condition causing
   the harmful interference has been corrected. Although not mandatory, it is
   strongly recommended that the manufacturer of an exempted device endeavor to
   have the device meet the specific technical standards in this part.

   (a) A digital device utilized exclusively in any transportation vehicle
   including motor vehicles and aircraft.

   (b) A digital device used exclusively as an electronic control or power
   system utilized by a public utility or in an industrial plant. The term
   public  utility  includes equipment only to the extent that it is in a
   dedicated building or large room owned or leased by the utility and does not
   extend to equipment installed in a subscriber's facility.

   (c) A digital device used exclusively as industrial, commercial, or medical
   test equipment.

   (d) A digital device utilized exclusively in an appliance, e.g., microwave
   oven, dishwasher, clothes dryer, air conditioner (central or window), etc.

   (e) Specialized medical digital devices (generally used at the direction of
   or under the supervision of a licensed health care practitioner) whether
   used in a patient's home or a health care facility. Non-specialized medical
   devices, i.e., devices marketed through retail channels for use by the
   general public, are not exempted. This exemption also does not apply to
   digital  devices  used  for record keeping or any purpose not directly
   connected with medical treatment.

   (f) Digital devices that have a power consumption not exceeding 6 nW.

   (g) Joystick controllers or similar devices, such as a mouse, used with
   digital devices but which contain only non-digital circuitry or a simple
   circuit to convert the signal to the format required (e.g., an integrated
   circuit for analog to digital conversion) are viewed as passive add-on
   devices, not themselves directly subject to the technical standards or the
   equipment authorization requirements.

   (h) Digital devices in which both the highest frequency generated and the
   highest frequency used are less than 1.705 MHz and which do not operate from
   the AC power lines or contain provisions for operation while connected to
   the AC power lines. Digital devices that include, or make provision for the
   use of, battery eliminators, AC adaptors or battery chargers which permit
   operation while charging or that connect to the AC power lines indirectly,
   obtaining their power through another device which is connected to the AC
   power lines, do not fall under this exemption.

   (i) Responsible parties should note that equipment containing more than one
   device is not exempt from the technical standards in this part unless all of
   the devices in the equipment meet the criteria for exemption. If only one of
   the included devices qualifies for exemption, the remainder of the equipment
   must comply with any applicable regulations. If a device performs more than
   one  function  and all of those functions do not meet the criteria for
   exemption, the device does not qualify for inclusion under the exemptions.

§ 15.105   Information to the user.

   top

   (a) For a Class A digital device or peripheral, the instructions furnished
   the user shall include the following or similar statement, placed in a
   prominent location in the text of the manual:

   Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
   a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
   are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
   when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
   generates,  uses,  and  can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
   installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
   harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
   a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
   user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

   (b) For a Class B digital device or peripheral, the instructions furnished
   the user shall include the following or similar statement, placed in a
   prominent location in the text of the manual:

   Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
   a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
   are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
   in  a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
   radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
   with  the  instructions,  may  cause  harmful  interference  to  radio
   communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
   occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
   interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
   turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
   the interference by one or more of the following measures:

   —Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

   —Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

   —Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
   which the receiver is connected.

   —Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

   (c) The provisions of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to
   digital devices exempted from the technical standards under the provisions
   of §15.103.

   (d) For systems incorporating several digital devices, the statement shown
   in paragraph (a) or (b) of this section needs to be contained only in the
   instruction manual for the main control unit.

   (e) In cases where the manual is provided only in a form other than paper,
   such as on a computer disk or over the Internet, the information required by
   this  section  may be included in the manual in that alternative form,
   provided the user can reasonably be expected to have the capability to
   access information in that form.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.107   Conducted limits.

   top

   (a) Except for Class A digital devices, for equipment that is designed to be
   connected to the public utility (AC) power line, the radio frequency voltage
   that  is  conducted  back  onto  the AC power line on any frequency or
   frequencies within the band 150 kHz to 30 MHz shall not exceed the limits in
   the  following table, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms line impedance
   stabilization  network  (LISN). Compliance with the provisions of this
   paragraph shall be based on the measurement of the radio frequency voltage
   between each power line and ground at the power terminal. The lower limit
   applies at the band edges.
   Frequency of emission (MHz) Conducted limit (dBμV)
                               Quasi-peak   Average
   0.15–0.5                    66 to 56*  56 to 46*
   0.5–5                       56         46
   5–30                        60         50

   *Decreases with the logarithm of the frequency.

   (b) For a Class A digital device that is designed to be connected to the
   public  utility  (AC)  power line, the radio frequency voltage that is
   conducted back onto the AC power line on any frequency or frequencies within
   the band 150 kHz to 30 MHz shall not exceed the limits in the following
   table,  as  measured  using  a 50 μH/50 ohms LISN. Compliance with the
   provisions of this paragraph shall be based on the measurement of the radio
   frequency voltage between each power line and ground at the power terminal.
   The lower limit applies at the boundary between the frequency ranges.
   Frequency of emission (MHz) Conducted limit (dBμV)
                               Quasi-peak   Average
   0.15–0.5                    79         66
   0.5–30                      73         60

   (c) The limits shown in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section shall not
   apply to carrier current systems operating as unintentional radiators on
   frequencies below 30 MHz. In lieu thereof, these carrier current systems
   shall be subject to the following standards:

   (1) For carrier current systems containing their fundamental emission within
   the frequency band 535–1705 kHz and intended to be received using a standard
   AM broadcast receiver: no limit on conducted emissions.

   (2) For all other carrier current systems: 1000 μV within the frequency band
   535–1705 kHz, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms LISN.

   (3) Carrier current systems operating below 30 MHz are also subject to the
   radiated emission limits in §15.109(e).

   (d) Measurements to demonstrate compliance with the conducted limits are not
   required for devices which only employ battery power for operation and which
   do not operate from the AC power lines or contain provisions for operation
   while  connected  to the AC power lines. Devices that include, or make
   provision for, the use of battery chargers which permit operating while
   charging, AC adaptors or battery eliminators or that connect to the AC power
   lines indirectly, obtaining their power through another device which is
   connected to the AC power lines, shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
   with the conducted limits.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992;  58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993;  66 FR 19098 , Apr. 13, 2001;  67 FR 45670 , July 10, 2002]

§ 15.109   Radiated emission limits.

   top

   (a) Except for Class A digital devices, the field strength of radiated
   emissions from unintentional radiators at a distance of 3 meters shall not
   exceed the following values:
   Frequency of emission (MHz) Field strength (microvolts/meter)
   30–88                                                     100
   88–216                                                    150
   216–960                                                   200
   Above 960                                                 500

   (b) The field strength of radiated emissions from a Class A digital device,
   as determined at a distance of 10 meters, shall not exceed the following:
   Frequency of emission (MHz) Field strength (microvolts/meter)
   30–88                                                      90
   88–216                                                    150
   216–960                                                   210
   Above 960                                                 300

   (c) In the emission tables above, the tighter limit applies at the band
   edges. Sections 15.33 and 15.35 which specify the frequency range over which
   radiated emissions are to be measured and the detector functions and other
   measurement standards apply.

   (d) For CB receivers, the field strength of radiated emissions within the
   frequency range of 25–30 MHz shall not exceed 40 microvolts/meter at a
   distance of 3 meters. The field strength of radiated emissions above 30 MHz
   from such devices shall comply with the limits in paragraph (a) of this
   section.

   (e)  Carrier  current systems used as unintentional radiators or other
   unintentional radiators that are designed to conduct their radio frequency
   emissions via connecting wires or cables and that operate in the frequency
   range of 9 kHz to 30 MHz, including devices that deliver the radio frequency
   energy to transducers, such as ultrasonic devices not covered under part 18
   of  this  chapter,  shall comply with the radiated emission limits for
   intentional radiators provided in §15.209 for the frequency range of 9 kHz
   to 30 MHz. As an alternative, carrier current systems used as unintentional
   radiators and operating in the frequency range of 525 kHz to 1705 kHz may
   comply  with  the  radiated emission limits provided in §15.221(a). At
   frequencies above 30 MHz, the limits in paragraph (a), (b), or (g) of this
   section, as appropriate, apply.

   (f) For a receiver which employs terminals for the connection of an external
   receiving antenna, the receiver shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
   with the provisions of this section with an antenna connected to the antenna
   terminals unless the antenna conducted power is measured as specified in
   §15.111(a).  If  a permanently attached receiving antenna is used, the
   receiver shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of
   this section.

   (g) As an alternative to the radiated emission limits shown in paragraphs
   (a) and (b) of this section, digital devices may be shown to comply with the
   standards contained in Third Edition of the International Special Committee
   on  Radio  Interference  (CISPR),  Pub.  22,  “Information  Technology
   Equipment—Radio  Disturbance  Characteristics—Limits  and  Methods  of
   Measurement” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38). In addition:

   (1) The test procedure and other requirements specified in this part shall
   continue to apply to digital devices.

   (2)  If,  in accordance with §15.33 of this part, measurements must be
   performed above 1000 MHz, compliance above 1000 MHz shall be demonstrated
   with  the  emission  limit in paragraph (a) or (b) of this section, as
   appropriate. Measurements above 1000 MHz may be performed at the distance
   specified in the CISPR 22 publications for measurements below 1000 MHz
   provided  the  limits  in  paragraphs  (a) and (b) of this section are
   extrapolated  to  the new measurement distance using an inverse linear
   distance extrapolation factor (20 dB/decade), e.g., the radiated limit above
   1000 MHz for a Class B digital device is 150 uV/m, as measured at a distance
   of 10 meters.

   (3) The measurement distances shown in CISPR Pub. 22, including measurements
   made in accordance with this paragraph above 1000 MHz, are considered, for
   the purpose of §15.31(f)(4) of this part, to be the measurement distances
   specified in this part.

   (4) If the radiated emissions are measured to demonstrate compliance with
   the  alternative  standards in this paragraph, compliance must also be
   demonstrated with the conducted limits shown in §15.107(e).

   (h) Radar detectors shall comply with the emission limits in paragraph (a)
   of this section over the frequency range of 11.7–12.2 GHz.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  56 FR 373 , Jan. 4, 1991;  58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993;  66 FR 19098 , Apr. 13, 2001;  67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002;
    69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004]

§ 15.111   Antenna power conduction limits for receivers.

   top

   (a) In addition to the radiated emission limits, receivers that operate
   (tune) in the frequency range 30 to 960 MHz and CB receivers that provide
   terminals for the connection of an external receiving antenna may be tested
   to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of §15.109 with the antenna
   terminals shielded and terminated with a resistive termination equal to the
   impedance specified for the antenna, provided these receivers also comply
   with  the following: With the receiver antenna terminal connected to a
   resistive termination equal to the impedance specified or employed for the
   antenna, the power at the antenna terminal at any frequency within the range
   of measurements specified in §15.33 shall not exceed 2.0 nanowatts.

   (b) CB receivers and receivers that operate (tune) in the frequency range 30
   to 960 MHz that are provided only with a permanently attached antenna shall
   comply with the radiated emission limitations in this part, as measured with
   the antenna attached.

§ 15.113   Power line carrier systems.

   top

   Power line carrier systems, as defined in §15.3(t), are subject only to the
   following requirements:

   (a) A power utility operating a power line carrier system shall submit the
   details of all existing systems plus any proposed new systems or changes to
   existing systems to an industry-operated entity as set forth in §90.63(g) of
   this chapter. No notification to the FCC is required.

   (b) The operating parameters of a power line carrier system (particularly
   the frequency) shall be selected to achieve the highest practical degree of
   compatibility with authorized or licensed users of the radio spectrum. The
   signals from this operation shall be contained within the frequency band 9
   kHz to 490 kHz. A power line carrier system shall operate on an unprotected,
   non-interference basis in accordance with §15.5 of this part. If harmful
   interference occurs, the electric power utility shall discontinue use or
   adjust  its  power  line carrier operation, as required, to remedy the
   interference. Particular attention should be paid to the possibility of
   interference to Loran C operations at 100 kHz.

   (c) Power line carrier system apparatus shall be operated with the minimum
   power possible to accomplish the desired purpose. No equipment authorization
   is required.

   (d) The best engineering principles shall be used in the generation of radio
   frequency currents by power line carrier systems to guard against harmful
   interference to authorized radio users, particularly on the fundamental and
   harmonic frequencies.

   (e) Power line carrier system apparatus shall conform to such engineering
   standards as may be promulgated by the Commission. In addition, such systems
   should adhere to industry approved standards designed to enhance the use of
   power line carrier systems.

   (f) The provisions of this section apply only to systems operated by a power
   utility  for general supervision of the power system and do not permit
   operation on electric lines which connect the distribution substation to the
   customer or house wiring. Such operation can be conducted under the other
   provisions of this part.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32339 , Aug. 7, 1989]

§ 15.115   TV interface devices, including cable system terminal devices.

   top

   (a) Measurements of the radiated emissions of a TV interface device shall be
   conducted  with  the  output terminal(s) of the device terminated by a
   resistance equal to the rated output impedance. The emanations of a TV
   interface device incorporating an intentional radiator shall not exceed the
   limits in §15.109 or subpart C of this part, whichever is higher for each
   frequency. Where it is possible to determine which portion of the device is
   contributing a particular radio frequency emission, the emissions from the
   TV  interface  device portion shall comply with the emission limits in
   §15.109, and the emissions from the intentional radiator shall comply with
   subpart C of this part.

   (b) Output signal limits:

   (1)  At  any  RF output terminal, the maximum measured RMS voltage, in
   microvolts, corresponding to the peak envelope power of the modulated signal
   during maximum amplitude peaks across a resistance (R in ohms) matching the
   rated output impedance of the TV interface device, shall not exceed the
   following:

   (i) For a cable system terminal device or a TV interface device used with a
   master antenna, 692.8 times the square root of (R) for the video signal and
   155 times the square root of (R) for the audio signal.

   (ii) For all other TV interface devices, 346.4 times the square root of (R)
   for the video signal and 77.5 times the square root of (R) for the audio
   signal.

   (2)  At  any  RF output terminal, the maximum measured RMS voltage, in
   microvolts, corresponding to the peak envelope power of the modulated signal
   during maximum amplitude peaks across a resistance (R in ohms) matching the
   rated output impedance of the TV interface device, of any emission appearing
   on frequencies removed by more than 4.6 MHz below or 7.4 MHz above the video
   carrier frequency on which the TV interface device is operated shall not
   exceed the following:

   (i) For a cable system terminal device or a TV interface device used with a
   master antenna, 692.8 times the square root of (R).

   (ii) For all other TV interface devices, 10.95 times the square root of (R).

   (3) The term master antenna used in this section refers to TV interface
   devices employed for central distribution of television or other video
   signals within a building. Such TV interface devices must be designed to:

   (i) Distribute multiple television signals at the same time;

   (ii) Distribute such signals by cable to outlets or TV receivers in multiple
   rooms in the building in which the TV interface devices are installed; and,

   (iii) Distribute all over-the-air or cable signals.

   Note: Cable-ready video cassette recorders continue to be subject to the
   provisions for general TV interface devices.

   (c) A TV interface device shall be equipped with a transfer switch for
   connecting the antenna terminals of a receiver selectively either to the
   receiving antenna or to the radio frequency output of the TV interface
   device, subject to the following:

   (1) When measured in any of its set positions, transfer switches shall
   comply with the following requirements:

   (i) For a cable system terminal device or a TV interface device equipped for
   use with a cable system or a master antenna, as defined in paragraph (b)(3)
   of this section, the isolation between the antenna and cable input terminals
   shall be at least 80 dB from 54 MHz to 216 MHz, at least 60 dB from 216 MHz
   to 550 MHz and at least 55 dB from 550 MHz to 806 MHz. The 80 dB standard
   applies at 216 MHz and the 60 dB standard applies at 550 MHz. In the case of
   a transfer switch requiring a power source, the required isolation shall be
   maintained in the event the device is not connected to a power source or
   power is interrupted. The provisions of this paragraph regarding frequencies
   in the range 550 MHz to 806 MHz are applicable as of June 30, 1997.

   (ii) For all other TV interface devices, the maximum voltage, corresponding
   to the peak envelope power of the modulated video signal during maximum
   amplitude peaks, in microvolts, appearing at the receiving antenna input
   terminals when terminated with a resistance (R in ohms) matching the rated
   impedance of the antenna input of the switch, shall not exceed 0.346 times
   the square root of (R).

   (iii) Measurement to determine compliance with the transfer switch limits
   shall be made using a connecting cable, where required, between the TV
   interface device and the transfer switch of the type and length:

   (A) Provided with the TV interface device,

   (B) Recommended in the instruction manual, or

   (C) Normally employed by the consumer.

   (2) A TV interface device shall be designed and constructed, to the extent
   practicable,  so  as to preclude the possibility that the consumer may
   inadvertently attach the output of the device to the receiving antenna, if
   any, without first going through the transfer switch.

   (3) A transfer switch is not required for a TV interface device that, when
   connected, results in the user no longer having any need to receive standard
   over-the-air broadcast signals via a separate antenna. A transfer switch is
   not required to be marketed with a cable system terminal device unless that
   device provides for the connection of an external antenna. A transfer switch
   is not required for a device that is intended to be used as an accessory to
   an authorized TV interface device.

   (4) An actual transfer switch is not required for a TV interface device,
   including  a  cable  system terminal device, that has an antenna input
   terminal(s); provided, the circuitry following the antenna input terminal(s)
   has sufficient bandwidth to allow the reception of all TV broadcast channels
   authorized under part 73 of this chapter and: For a cable system terminal
   device that can alternate between the reception of cable television service
   and an antenna, compliance with the isolation requirement specified in
   paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section can be demonstrated; and, for all other
   TV  interface  devices,  the  maximum voltage appearing at the antenna
   terminal(s)  does not exceed the limit in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this
   section.

   (5) If a transfer switch is not required, the following label shall be used
   in addition to the label shown in §15.19(a):

   This device is intended to be attached to a receiver that is not used to
   receive over-the-air broadcast signals. Connection of this device in any
   other fashion may cause harmful interference to radio communications and is
   in violation of the FCC Rules, part 15.

   (d) A TV interface device, including a cable system terminal device, shall
   incorporate circuitry to automatically prevent emanations from the device
   from exceeding the technical specifications in this part. These circuits
   shall be adequate to accomplish their functions when the TV interface device
   is presented, if applicable, with video input signal levels in the range of
   one to five volts; this requirement is not applicable to a TV interface
   device that uses a built-in signal source and has no provisions for the
   connection of an external signal source. For devices that contain provisions
   for an external signal source but do not contain provisions for the input of
   an external baseband signal, e.g., some cable system terminal devices,
   compliance with the provisions of this paragraph shall be demonstrated with
   a radio frequency input signal of 0 to 25 dBmV.

   (e) For cable system terminal devices and TV interface devices used with a
   master antenna, as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, the holder
   of the grant of authorization shall specify in the instruction manual or
   pamphlet, if a manual is not provided, the types of wires or coaxial cables
   necessary to ensure that the unit complies with the requirements of this
   part.  The  holder  of the grant of authorization must comply with the
   provisions of §15.27. For all other TV interface devices, the wires or
   coaxial cables used to couple the output signals to the TV receiver shall be
   provided by the responsible party.

   (f)  A  TV  interface device which is submitted to the Commission as a
   composite device in a single enclosure containing a RF modulator, video
   source  and  other  component  devices  shall be submitted on a single
   application (FCC Form 731) and shall be authorized as a single device.

   (g) An external device or accessory that is intended to be attached to a TV
   interface  device  shall  comply with the technical and administrative
   requirements set out in the rules under which it operates. For example, a
   personal  computer  must  be  certificated to show compliance with the
   regulations for digital devices.

   (h) Stand-alone switches used to alternate between cable service and an
   antenna  shall  provide  isolation between the antenna and cable input
   terminals that is at least 80 dB from 54 MHz to 216 MHz, at least 60 dB from
   216 MHz to 550 MHz and at least 55 dB from 550 MHz to 806 MHz. The 80 dB
   standard applies at 216 MHz and the 60 dB standard applies at 550 MHz. In
   the case of stand-alone switches requiring a power source, the required
   isolation shall be maintained in the event the device is not connected to a
   power source or power is interrupted. The provisions of this paragraph are
   applicable as of June 30, 1997.

   (i) Switches and other devices intended to be used to by-pass the processing
   circuitry of a cable system terminal device, whether internal to such a
   terminal device or a stand-alone unit, shall not attenuate the input signal
   more than 6 dB from 54 MHz to 550 MHz, or more than 8 dB from 550 MHz to 804
   MHz. The 6 dB standard applies at 550 MHz. The provisions of this paragraph
   are applicable June 30, 1997.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992;  59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994;  61 FR 18509 , Apr. 26, 1996]

§ 15.117   TV broadcast receivers.

   top

   (a) All TV broadcast receivers shipped in interstate commerce or imported
   into the United States, for sale or resale to the public, shall comply with
   the provisions of this section, except that paragraphs (f) and (g) of this
   section  shall not apply to the features of such sets that provide for
   reception of digital television signals. The reference in this section to TV
   broadcast receivers also includes devices, such as TV interface devices and
   set-top devices that are intended to provide audio-video signals to a video
   monitor, that incorporate the tuner portion of a TV broadcast receiver and
   that are equipped with an antenna or antenna terminals that can be used for
   off-the-air reception of TV broadcast signals, as authorized under part 73
   of this chapter.

   (b) TV broadcast receivers shall be capable of adequately receiving all
   channels allocated by the Commission to the television broadcast service.

   (c) On a given receiver, use of the UHF and VHF tuning systems shall provide
   approximately the same degree of tuning accuracy with approximately the same
   expenditure of time and effort: Provided, however, That this requirement
   will  be  considered  to be met if the need for routine fine tuning is
   eliminated on UHF channels.

   (1)  Basic tuning mechanism. If a TV broadcast receiver is equipped to
   provide for repeated access to VHF television channels at discrete tuning
   positions, that receiver shall be equipped to provide for repeated access to
   a minimum of six UHF television channels at discrete tuning positions.
   Unless a discrete tuning position is provided for each channel allocated to
   UHF television, each position shall be readily adjustable to a particular
   UHF channel by the user without the use of tools. If 12 or fewer discrete
   tuning positions are provided, each position shall be adjustable to receive
   any channel allocated to UHF television.

   Note: The combination of detented rotary switch and pushbutton controls is
   acceptable, provided UHF channels, after their initial selection, can be
   accurately tuned with an expenditure of time and effort approximately the
   same as that used in accurately tuning VHF channels. A UHF tuning system
   comprising five pushbuttons and a separate manual tuning knob is considered
   to provide repeated access to six channels at discrete tuning positions. A
   one-knob (VHF/UHF) tuning system providing repeated access to 11 or more
   discrete tuning positions is also acceptable, provided each of the tuning
   positions is readily adjustable, without the use of tools, to receive any
   UHF channel.

   (2) Tuning controls and channel readout. UHF tuning controls and channel
   readout  on  a  given  receiver shall be comparable in size, location,
   accessibility and legibility to VHF controls and readout on that receiver.

   Note: Differences between UHF and VHF channel readout that follow directly
   from the larger number of UHF television channels available are acceptable
   if it is clear that a good faith effort to comply with the provisions of
   this section has been made.

   (d) If equipment and controls that tend to simplify, expedite or perfect the
   reception of television signals (e.g., AFC, visual aids, remote control, or
   signal  seeking  capability  referred to generally as tuning aids) are
   incorporated into the VHF portion of a TV broadcast receiver, tuning aids of
   the same type and comparable capability and quality shall be provided for
   the UHF portion of that receiver.

   (e) If a television receiver has an antenna affixed to the VHF antenna
   terminals, it must have an antenna designed for and capable of receiving all
   UHF television channels affixed to the UHF antenna terminals. If a VHF
   antenna is provided with but not affixed to a receiver, a UHF antenna shall
   be provided with the receiver.

   (f) The picture sensitivity of a TV broadcast receiver averaged for all
   channels between 14 and 69 inclusive shall not be more than 8dB larger than
   the peak picture sensitivity of that receiver averaged for all channels
   between 2 and 13 inclusive.

   (g) The noise figure for any television channel 14 to 69 inclusive shall not
   exceed 14 dB. A TV receiver model is considered to comply with this noise
   figure if the maximum noise figure for channels 14–69 inclusive of 97.5% of
   all receivers within that model does not exceed 14 dB.

   (1) The responsible party shall measure the noise figure of a number of UHF
   channels of the test sample to give reasonable assurance that the UHF noise
   figure for each channel complies with the above limit.

   (2) The responsible party shall insert in his files a statement explaining
   the  basis  on which it will rely to ensure that at least 97.5% of all
   production units of the test sample that are manufactured have a noise
   figure of no greater than 14 dB.

   (3) [Reserved]

   (4) In the case of a TV tuner built-in as part of a video tape recorder that
   uses  a power splitter between the antenna terminals of the video tape
   recorder and the input terminals of the TV tuner or a TV broadcast receiver
   that uses a power splitter between the antenna terminals of two or more UHF
   tuners contained within that receiver, 4 dB may be subtracted from the noise
   figure measured at the antenna terminals of the video tape recorder or TV
   broadcast receiver for determining compliance of the UHF tuner(s) with the
   14 dB noise figure limit.

   (h) Digital television reception capability. TV broadcast receivers are
   required only to provide useable picture and sound commensurate with their
   video and audio capabilities when receiving digital television signals.

   (i) Digital television reception capability implementation schedule. (1)
   Responsible parties, as defined in §2.909 of this chapter, are required to
   equip new TV broadcast receivers that are shipped in interstate commerce or
   imported from any foreign country into the United States and for which they
   are responsible to comply with the provisions of this section in accordance
   with the following schedule:

   (i)  Receivers  with  screen  sizes 36&inch; and above—50% of all of a
   responsible party's units must include DTV tuners effective July 1, 2004;
   100% of such units must include DTV tuners effective July 1, 2005.

   (ii) Receivers with screen sizes 25&inch; to less than 36&inch;—50% of all
   of a responsible party's units must include DTV tuners effective July 1,
   2005; 100% of such units must include DTV tuners effective March 1, 2006.

   (iii) Receivers with screen sizes less than 25"—100% of all such units must
   include DTV tuners effective March 1, 2007.

   (iv) Other video devices (videocassette recorders (VCRs), digital video
   recorders  such  as  hard  drive and DVD recorders, etc.) that receive
   television signals—100% of all such units must include DTV tuners effective
   March 1, 2007.

   (2) For purposes of this implementation schedule, screen sizes are to be
   measured diagonally across the picture viewing area. The requirement for
   equipping new TV broadcast receivers with DTV reception capability does not
   apply  to units with integrated tuners/displays that have screen sizes
   measuring less than 7.8 inches vertically, i.e., the vertical measurement of
   a screen in the 4:3 aspect ratio that measures 13' diagonally across the
   picture viewing area.

   (3) Responsible parties may include combinations of DTV monitors and set-top
   DTV tuners in meeting the required percentages of units with a DTV tuner if
   such combinations are marketed together with a single price.

   (4) The requirement to include digital television reception capability in
   new  TV  broadcast  receivers does not apply to devices such as mobile
   telephones and personal digital assistants where such devices do not include
   the  capability to receive TV service on the frequencies allocated for
   broadcast television service.

   (j) For a TV broadcast receiver equipped with a cable input selector switch,
   the selector switch shall provide, in any of its set positions, isolation
   between the antenna and cable input terminals of at least 80 dB from 54 MHz
   to 216 MHz, at least 60 dB from 216 MHz to 550 MHz and at least 55 dB from
   550 MHz to 806 MHz. The 80 dB standard applies at 216 MHz and the 60 dB
   standard applies at 550 MHz. In the case of a selector switch requiring a
   power source, the required isolation shall be maintained in the event the
   device is not connected to a power source or power is interrupted. An actual
   switch that can alternate between reception of cable television service and
   an antenna is not required for a TV broadcast receiver, provided compliance
   with  the  isolation  requirement  specified  in this paragraph can be
   demonstrated and the circuitry following the antenna input terminal(s) has
   sufficient band-width to allow the reception of all TV broadcast channels
   authorized under this chapter. The provisions of this paragraph regarding
   frequencies in the range 550 MHz to 806 MHz are applicable as of June 30,
   1997.

   (k) The following requirements apply to all responsible parties, as defined
   in §2.909 of this chapter, and any person that displays or offers for sale
   or rent television receiving equipment that is not capable of receiving,
   decoding and tuning digital signals.

   (1)  Such  parties  and persons shall place conspicuously and in close
   proximity to such television broadcast receivers a sign containing, in clear
   and  conspicuous print, the Consumer Alert disclosure text required by
   paragraph (k)(3) of this section. The text should be in a size of type large
   enough to be clear, conspicuous and readily legible, consistent with the
   dimensions of the equipment and the label. The information may be printed on
   a transparent material and affixed to the screen, if the receiver includes a
   display, in a manner that is removable by the consumer and does not obscure
   the picture, or, if the receiver does not include a display, in a prominent
   location on the device, such as on the top or front of the device, when
   displayed for sale, or the information in this format may be displayed
   separately  immediately adjacent to each television broadcast receiver
   offered for sale and clearly associated with the analog-only model to which
   it pertains.

   (2) If such parties and persons display or offer for sale or rent such
   television broadcast receivers via direct mail, catalog, or electronic
   means, they shall prominently display in close proximity to the images or
   descriptions  of  such  television  broadcast  receivers, in clear and
   conspicuous print, the Consumer Alert disclosure text required by paragraph
   (k)(3) of this section. The text should be in a size large enough to be
   clear, conspicuous, and readily legible, consistent with the dimensions of
   the advertisement or description.

   (3) Consumer alert. This television receiver has only an analog broadcast
   tuner and will require a converter box after February 17, 2009, to receive
   over-the-air broadcasts with an antenna because of the Nation's transition
   to digital broadcasting. Analog-only TVs should continue to work as before
   with cable and satellite TV services, gaming consoles, VCRs, DVD players,
   and similar products. For more information, call the Federal Communications
   Commission at 1–888–225–5322 (TTY: 1–888–835–5322) or visit the Commission's
   digital television Web site at: http://www.dtv.gov. 

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1993, as amended at  59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994;  61 FR 30532 , June 17, 1996;  67 FR 63294 , Oct. 11, 2002;  70 FR 38804 , July 6, 2005;
    70 FR 75743 , Dec. 21, 2005;  72 FR 26560 , May 10, 2007]

§ 15.118   Cable ready consumer electronics equipment.

   top

   (a) All consumer electronics TV receiving equipment marketed in the United
   States as cable ready or cable compatible shall comply with the provisions
   of this section. Consumer electronics TV receiving equipment that includes
   features intended for use with cable service but does not fully comply with
   the provisions of this section are subject to the labelling requirements of
   §15.19(d). Until such time as generally accepted testing standards are
   developed, paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section will apply only to the
   analog portion of covered consumer electronics TV receiving equipment

   (b) Cable ready consumer electronics equipment shall be capable of receiving
   all NTSC or similar video channels on channels 1 through 125 of the channel
   allocation plan set forth in CEA–542–B: “CEA Standard: Cable Television
   Channel Identification Plan,” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38).

   (c) Cable ready consumer electronics equipment must meet the following
   technical performance requirements. Compliance with these requirements shall
   be determined by performing measurements at the unfiltered IF output port.
   Where  appropriate,  the Commission will consider allowing alternative
   measurement methods.

   (1) Adjacent channel interference. In the presence of a lower adjacent
   channel  CW signal that is 1.5 MHz below the desired visual carrier in
   frequency and 10 dB below the desired visual carrier in amplitude, spurious
   signals within the IF passband shall be attenuated at least 55 dB below the
   visual carrier of the desired signal. The desired input signal shall be an
   NTSC visual carrier modulated with a 10 IRE flat field with color burst and
   the  aural  carrier  which is 10 dB below the visual carrier should be
   unmodulated. Measurements are to be performed for input signal levels of 0
   dBmV and +15 dBmV, with the receiver tuned to ten evenly spaced EIA IS–132
   channels covering the band 54 MHz to 804 MHz.

   (2) Image channel interference. Image channel interference within the IF
   passband shall be attenuated below the visual carrier of the desired channel
   by at least 60 dB from 54 MHz to 714 MHz and 50 dB from 714 MHz to 804 MHz.
   The 60 dB standard applies at 714 MHz. In testing for compliance with this
   standard, the desired input signal is to be an NTSC signal on which the
   visual carrier is modulated with a 10 IRE flat field with color burst and
   the aural carrier is unmodulated and 10 dB below the visual carrier. The
   undesired test signal shall be a CW signal equal in amplitude to the desired
   visual carrier and located 90 MHz above the visual carrier frequency of the
   desired channel. Measurements shall be performed for input signals of 0 dBmV
   and +15 dBmV, with the receiver tuned to at least ten evenly spaced EIA
   IS–132 channels covering the band 54 MHz to 804 MHz.

   (3) Direct pickup interference. The direct pickup (DPU) of a co-channel
   interfering ambient field by a cable ready device shall not exceed the
   following criteria. The ratio of the desired to undesired signal levels at
   the IF passband on each channel shall be at least 45 dB. The average ratio
   over the six channels shall be at least 50 dB. The desired input signal
   shall be an NTSC signal having a visual carrier level of 0 dBmV. The visual
   carrier is modulated with a 10 IRE flat field with color burst, visual to
   aural carrier ratio of 10 dB, aural carrier unmodulated. The equipment under
   test (EUT) shall be placed on a rotatable table that is one meter in height.
   Any excess length of the power cord and other connecting leads shall be
   coiled  on  the  floor under the table. The EUT shall be immersed in a
   horizontally polarized uniform CW field of 100 mV/m at a frequency 2.55 MHz
   above the visual carrier of the EUT tuned channel. Measurements shall be
   made with the EUT tuned to six EIA IS–132 channels, two each in the low VHF,
   high VHF and UHF broadcast bands. On each channel, the levels at the IF
   passband due to the desired and interfering signals are to be measured.

   (4)  Tuner  overload. Spurious signals within the IF passband shall be
   attenuated at least 55 dB below the visual carrier of the desired channel
   using  a  comb-like  spectrum  input  with  each visual carrier signal
   individually set at +15 dBmV from 54 to 550 MHz. The desired input signal is
   to be an NTSC signal on which the visual carrier is modulated with a 10 IRE
   flat field with color burst and the aural carrier is unmodulated and 10 dB
   below the visual carrier. Measurements shall be made with the receiver tuned
   to at least seven evenly spaced EIA IS–132 channels covering the band 54 MHz
   to 550 MHz. In addition, spurious signals within the IF passband shall be
   attenuated at least 51 dB below the visual carrier of the desired channel
   using a comb spectrum input with each signal individually set at +15 dBmV
   from 550 to 804 MHz. Measurements shall be made with the receiver tuned to
   at least three evenly spaced EIA IS–132 channels covering the band 550 MHz
   to 804 MHz.

   (5) Cable input conducted emissions. (i) Conducted spurious emissions that
   appear at the cable input to the device must meet the following criteria.
   The input shall be an NTSC video carrier modulated with a 10 IRE flat field
   with color burst at a level of 0 dBmV and with a visual to aural ratio of 10
   dB. The aural carrier shall be unmodulated. The peak level of the spurious
   signals  will  be  measured  using  a spectrum analyzer connected by a
   directional coupler to the cable input of the equipment under test. Spurious
   signal levels must not exceed the limits in the following table:

   From 54 MHz up to and including 300 MHz–26 dBmV

   From 300 MHz up to and including 450 MHz–20 dBmV

   From 450 MHz up to and including 804 MHz-15 dBmV

   (ii) The average of the measurements on multiple channels from 450 MHz up to
   and including 804 MHz shall be no greater than -20 dBmV. Measurements shall
   be made with the receiver tuned to at least four EIA IS–132 channels in each
   of the above bands. The test channels are to be evenly distributed across
   each of the bands. Measurements for conducted emissions caused by sources
   internal to the device are to be made in a shielded room. Measurements for
   conducted emissions caused by external signal sources shall be made in an
   ambient RF field whose field strength is 100 mV/m, following the same test
   conditions as described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.

   (d) The field strength of radiated emissions from cable ready consumer
   electronics  equipment  shall not exceed the limits in §15.109(a) when
   measured in accordance with the applicable procedures specified in §§15.31
   and 15.35 for unintentional radiators, with the following modifications.
   During testing the NTSC input signal level is to be +15 dBmV, with a visual
   to aural ratio of 10 dB. The visual carrier is to be modulated by a 10 IRE
   flat  field  with color burst; the aural carrier is to be unmodulated.
   Measurements are to be taken on six EIA IS–132 channels evenly spaced across
   the required RF input range of the equipment under test.

   Note: The provisions of paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section are
   applicable as of June 30, 1997.

   [ 59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994, as amended at  61 FR 18509 , Apr. 26, 1996;  65 FR 64391 , Oct. 27, 2000;  68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003;  69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004;
    69 FR 57861 , Sept. 28, 2004]

§ 15.119   Closed caption decoder requirements for analog television receivers.

   top

   (a) Effective July 1, 1993, all TV broadcast receivers with picture screens
   33  cm  (13  in) or larger in diameter shipped in interstate commerce,
   manufactured, assembled, or imported from any foreign country into the
   United States shall comply with the provisions of this section.

   Note:  This paragraph places no restriction on the shipping or sale of
   television receivers that were manufactured before July 1, 1993.

   (b) Transmission format. Closed-caption information is transmitted on line
   21 of field 1 of the vertical blanking interval of television signals, in
   accordance with §73.682(a)(22) of this chapter.

   (c) Operating modes. The television receiver will employ customer-selectable
   modes of operation for TV and Caption. A third mode of operation, Text, may
   be included on an optional basis. The Caption and Text Modes may contain
   data in either of two operating channels, referred to in this document as C1
   and C2. The television receiver must decode both C1 and C2 captioning, and
   must display the captioning for whichever channel the user selects. The TV
   Mode of operation allows the video to be viewed in its original form. The
   Caption and Text Modes define one or more areas (called “boxes”) on the
   screen within which caption or text characters are displayed.

   Note: For more information regarding Text mode, see “Television Captioning
   for the Deaf: Signal and Display Specifications”, Engineering Report No.
   E–7709–C, Public Broadcasting Service, dated May 1980, and “TeleCaption II
   Decoder Module Performance Specification”, National Captioning Institute,
   Inc., dated November 1985. These documents are available, respectively, from
   the Public Broadcasting Service, 1320 Braddock Place, Alexandria, VA 22314
   and from the National Captioning Institute, Inc., 5203 Leesburg Pike, Falls
   Church, VA 22041.

   (d) Screen format. The display area for captioning and text shall fall
   approximately within the safe caption area as defined in paragraph (n)(12)
   of this section. This display area will be further divided into 15 character
   rows of equal height and 32 columns of equal width, to provide accurate
   placement of text on the screen. Vertically, the display area begins on line
   43 and is 195 lines high, ending on line 237 on an interlaced display. All
   captioning and text shall fall within these established columns and rows.
   The characters must be displayed clearly separated from the video over which
   they are placed. In addition, the user must have the capability to select a
   black background over which the captioned letters are displaced.

   (1) Caption mode. In the Caption Mode, text can appear on up to 4 rows
   simultaneously anywhere on the screen within the defined display area. In
   addition, a solid space equal to one column width may be placed before the
   first  character  and  after the last character of each row to enhance
   legibility. The caption area will be transparent anywhere that either:

   (i) No standard space character or other character has been addressed and no
   accompanying solid space is needed; or,

   (ii) An accompanying solid space is used and a “transparent space” special
   character has been addressed which does not immediately precede or follow a
   displayed character.

   (2) [Reserved]

   (e) Presentation format. In analyzing the presentation of characters, it is
   convenient to think in terms of a non-visible cursor which marks the screen
   position at which the next event in a given mode and data channel will
   occur. The receiver remembers the cursor position for each mode even when
   data are received for a different address in an alternate mode or data
   channel.

   (1) Screen addressing. Two kinds of control codes are used to move the
   cursor to specific screen locations. In Caption Mode, these addressing codes
   will affect both row and column positioning. In Text Mode, the codes affect
   only column positioning. In both modes, the addressing codes are optional.
   Default positions are defined for each mode and style when no addressing
   code is provided.

   (i) The first type of addressing code is the Preamble Address Code (PAC). It
   assigns a row number and one of eight “indent” figures. Each successive
   indent moves the cursor four columns to the right (starting from the left
   margin). Thus, an indent of 0 places the cursor at Column 1, an indent of 4
   sets it at Column 5, etc. The PAC indent is non-destructive to displayable
   characters. It will not affect the display to the left of the new cursor
   position on the indicated row. Note that Preamble Address Codes also set
   initial  attributes  for  the displayable characters which follow. See
   paragraph (h) of this section and the Preamble Address Code table.

   (ii) The second type of addressing code is the Tab Offset, which is one of
   three Miscellaneous Control Codes. Tab Offset will move the cursor one, two,
   or three columns to the right. The character cells skipped over will be
   unaffected; displayable characters in these cells, if any, will remain
   intact while empty cells will remain empty, in the same manner that a PAC
   indent is non-destructive.

   (2) [Reserved]

   (f) Caption Mode. There are three styles of presenting text in Caption Mode:
   roll-up, pop-on, and paint-on. Character display varies significantly with
   the style used, but certain rules of character erasure are common to all
   styles. A character can be erased by addressing another character to the
   same screen location or by backspacing over the character from a subsequent
   location  on  the same row. The entire displayed memory will be erased
   instantly by receipt of an Erase Displayed Memory command. Both displayed
   memory and non-displayed memory will be entirely erased simultaneously by
   either: The user switching receiver channels or data channels (C1/C2) or
   fields  (F1/F2)  in  decoders so equipped; the loss of valid data (see
   paragraph  (j)  of this section); or selecting non-captioning receiver
   functions which use the display memory of the decoder. Receipt of an End of
   Caption command will cause a displayed caption to become non-displayed (and
   vice versa) without being erased from memory. Changing the receiver to a
   non-captioning mode which does not require use of the decoder's display
   memory will leave that memory intact, and the decoder will continue to
   process data as if the caption display were selected.

   (1) Roll-up. Roll-up style captioning is initiated by receipt of one of
   three Miscellaneous Control Codes that determine the maximum number of rows
   displayed simultaneously, either 2, 3 or 4 contiguous rows. These are the
   three Roll-Up Caption commands.

   (i) The bottom row of the display is known as the “base row”. The cursor
   always  remains  on  the  base row. Rows of text roll upwards into the
   contiguous rows immediately above the base row to create a “window” 2 to 4
   rows high.

   (ii)  The  Roll-Up  command, in normal practice, will be followed (not
   necessarily immediately) by a Preamble Address Code indicating the base row
   and the horizontal indent position. If no Preamble Address Code is received,
   the base row will default to Row 15 or, if a roll-up caption is currently
   displayed, to the same base row last received, and the cursor will be placed
   at Column 1. If the Preamble Address Code received contains a different base
   row than that of a currently displayed caption, the entire window will move
   intact (and without erasing) to the new base row immediately.

   (iii) Each time a Carriage Return is received, the text in the top row of
   the window is erased from memory and from the display or scrolled off the
   top of the window. The remaining rows of text are each rolled up into the
   next highest row in the window, leaving the base row blank and ready to
   accept new text. This roll-up must appear smooth to the user, and must take
   no more than 0.433 second to complete. The cursor is automatically placed at
   Column 1 (pending receipt of a Preamble Address Code).

   (iv) Increasing or decreasing the number of roll-up rows instantly changes
   the size of the active display window, appropriately turning on or off the
   display of the top one or two rows. A row which is turned off should also be
   erased from memory.

   (v)  Characters  are always displayed immediately when received by the
   receiver. Once the cursor reaches the 32nd column position on any row, all
   subsequent characters received prior to a Carriage Return, Preamble Address
   Code, or Backspace will be displayed in that column replacing any previous
   character occupying that address.

   (vi) The cursor moves automatically one column to the right after each
   character or Mid-Row Code received. A Backspace will move the cursor one
   column to the left, erasing the character or Mid-Row Code occupying that
   location. (A Backspace received when the cursor is in Column 1 will be
   ignored.)

   (vii) The Delete to End of Row command will erase from memory any characters
   or control codes starting at the current cursor location and in all columns
   to its right on the same row. If no displayable characters remain on the row
   after the Delete to End of Row is acted upon, the solid space (if any) for
   that row should also be erased to conform with the following provisions.

   (viii) If a solid space is used for legibility, it should appear when the
   first displayable character (not a transparent space) or Mid-Row Code is
   received on a row, not when the Preamble Address Code, if any, is given. A
   row on which there are no displayable characters or Mid-Row Codes will not
   display a solid space, even when rolled up between two rows which do display
   a solid space.

   (ix) If the reception of data for a row is interrupted by data for the
   alternate data channel or for Text Mode, the display of caption text will
   resume  from  the same cursor position if a Roll-Up Caption command is
   received and no Preamble Address Code is given which would move the cursor.

   (x) A roll-up caption remains displayed until one of the standard caption
   erasure techniques is applied. Receipt of a Resume Caption Loading command
   (for pop-on style) or a Resume Direct Captioning command (for paint-on
   style) will not affect a roll-up display. Receipt of a Roll-Up Caption
   command  will  cause  any pop-on or paint-on caption to be erased from
   displayed memory and non-displayed memory.

   (2) Pop-on. Pop-on style captioning is initiated by receipt of a Resume
   Caption Loading command. Subsequent data are loaded into a non-displayed
   memory and held there until an End of Caption command is received, at which
   point the non-displayed memory becomes the displayed memory and vice versa.
   (This process is often referred to as “flipping memories” and does not
   automatically erase memory.) An End of Caption command forces the receiver
   into pop-on style if no Resume Caption Loading command has been received
   which  would  do  so.  The display will be capable of 4 full rows, not
   necessarily contiguous, simultaneous anywhere on the screen.

   (i) Preamble Address Codes can be used to move the cursor around the screen
   in random order to place captions on Rows 1 to 15. Carriage Returns have no
   effect on cursor location during caption loading.

   (ii) The cursor moves automatically one column to the right after each
   character or Mid-Row Code received. Receipt of a Backspace will move the
   cursor  one  column to the left, erasing the character or Mid-Row Code
   occupying that location. (A Backspace received when the cursor is in Column
   1 will be ignored.) Once the cursor reaches the 32nd column position on any
   row, all subsequent characters received prior to a Backspace, an End of
   Caption, or a Preamble Address Code, will replace any previous character at
   that location.

   (iii) The Delete to End of Row command will erase from memory any characters
   or control codes starting at the current cursor location and in all columns
   to its right on the same row. If no displayable characters remain on a row
   after the Delete to End of Row is acted upon, the solid space (if any) for
   that element should also be erased.

   (iv) If data reception is interrupted during caption loading by data for the
   alternate caption channel or for Text Mode, caption loading will resume at
   the same cursor position if a Resume Caption Loading command is received and
   no Preamble Address Code is given that would move the cursor.

   (v)  Characters remain in non-displayed memory until an End of Caption
   command flips memories. The caption will be erased without being displayed
   upon receipt of an Erase Non-Displayed Memory command, a Roll-Up Caption
   command, or if the user switches receiver channels, data channels or fields,
   or upon the loss of valid data (see paragraph (j) of this section).

   (vi) A pop-on caption, once displayed, remains displayed until one of the
   standard caption erasure techniques is applied or until a Roll-Up Caption
   command is received. Characters within a displayed pop-on caption will be
   replaced by receipt of the Resume Direct Captioning command and paint-on
   style techniques (see below).

   (3) Paint-on. Paint-on style captioning is initiated by receipt of a Resume
   Direct Captioning command. Subsequent data are addressed immediately to
   displayed memory without need for an End of Caption command.

   (i) Preamble Address Codes can be used to move the cursor around the screen
   in random order to display captions on Rows 1 to 15. Carriage Returns have
   no affect on cursor location during direct captioning. The cursor moves
   automatically one column to the right after each character or Mid-Row Code
   is received. Receipt of a Backspace will move the cursor one column to the
   left, erasing the character or Mid-Row Code occupying that location. (A
   Backspace received when the cursor is in Column 1 will be ignored.) Once the
   cursor  reaches  the  32nd  column position on any row, all subsequent
   characters received prior to a Preamble Address Code or Backspace will be
   displayed in that column replacing any previous character occupying that
   location.

   (ii) The Delete to End of Row command will erase from memory any characters
   or control codes starting at the current cursor location and in all columns
   to its right on the same row. If no displayable characters remain on the row
   after the Delete to End of Row is acted upon, the solid space (if any) for
   that element should also be erased.

   (iii) If the reception of data is interrupted during the direct captioning
   by data for the alternate caption channel or for Text Mode, the display of
   caption text will resume at the same cursor position if a Resume Direct
   Captioning command is received and no Preamble Address Code is given which
   would move the cursor.

   (iv) Characters remain displayed until one of the standard caption erasure
   techniques is applied or until a Roll-Up Caption command is received. An End
   of Caption command leaves a paint-on caption fully intact in non-displayed
   memory. In other words, a paint-on style caption behaves precisely like a
   pop-on style caption which has been displayed.

   (g) Character format. Characters are to be displayed on the screen within a
   character “cell” which is the height and width of a single row and column.
   The  following  codes define the displayable character set. Television
   receivers manufactured prior to January 1, 1996 and having a character
   resolution  of  5×7 dots, or less, may display the allowable alternate
   characters  in the character table. A statement must be in a prominent
   location  on  the  box or other package in which the receiver is to be
   marketed, and information must be in the owner's manual, indicating the
   receiver displays closed captioning in upper case only.

   Character Set Table

   Special Characters

   These require two bytes for each symbol. Each hex code as shown will be
   preceded by a 11h for data channel 1 or by a 19h for data channel 2. For
   example: 19h 37h will place a musical note in data channel 2.
   HEX Example Alternate           Description
    30    ®    See note^1 Registered mark symbol
    31    °               Degree sign
    32   1/2              1/2
    33    ¿               Inverse query
    34   ^TM   See note^1 Trademark symbol
    35    ¢               Cents sign
    36    £               Pounds Sterling sign
    37    ♪               Music note
    38    à        A      Lower-case a with grave accent
    39                    Transparent space
    3A    è        E      Lower-case e with grave accent
    3B    â        A      Lower-case a with circumflex
    3C    ê        E      Lower-case e with circumflex
    3D    î        I      Lower-case i with circumflex
    3E    ô        O      Lower-case o with circumflex
    3F    û        U      Lower-case u with circumflex

   ^1Note: The registered and trademark symbols are used to satisfy certain
   legal requirements. There are various legal ways in which these symbols may
   be drawn or displayed. For example, the trademark symbol may be drawn with
   the “T” next to the “M” or over the “M”. It is preferred that the trademark
   symbol  be  superscripted, i.e., XYZ^TM. It is left to each individual
   manufacturer to interpret these symbols in any way that meets the legal
   needs of the user.

   Standard characters
   HEX Example Alternate          Description
    20                   Standard space
    21    !              Exclamation mark
    22    “              Quotation mark
    23    #              Pounds (number) sign
    24    $              Dollar sign
    25    %              Percentage sign
    26    &              Ampersand
    27    '              Apostrophe
    28    (              Open parentheses
    29    )              Close parentheses
    2A    á        A     Lower-case a with acute accent
    2B    +              Plus sign
    2C    ,              Comma
    2D    −              Minus (hyphen) sign
    2E    .              Period
    2F    /              Slash
    30    0              Zero
    31    1              One
    32    2              Two
    33    3              Three
    34    4              Four
    35    5              Five
    36    6              Six
    37    7              Seven
    38    8              Eight
    39    9              Nine
    3A    :              Colon
    3B    ;              Semi-colon
    3C    <              Less than sign
    3D    =              Equal sign
    3E    >              Greater than sign
    3F    ?              Question mark
    40    @              At sign
    41    A              Upper-case A
    42    B              Upper-case B
    43    C              Upper-case C
    44    D              Upper-case D
    45    E              Upper-case E
    46    F              Upper-case F
    47    G              Upper-case G
    48    H              Upper-case H
    49    I              Upper-case I
    4A    J              Upper-case J
    4B    K              Upper-case K
    4C    L              Upper-case L
    4D    M              Upper-case M
    4E    N              Upper-case N
    4F    O              Upper-case O
    50    P              Upper-case P
    51    Q              Upper-case Q
    52    R              Upper-case R
    53    S              Upper-case S
    54    T              Upper-case T
    55    U              Upper-case U
    56    V              Upper-case V
    57    W              Upper-case W
    58    X              Upper-case X
    59    Y              Upper-case Y
    5A    Z              Upper-case Z
    5B    [              Open bracket
    5C    é        E     Lower-case e with acute accent
    5D    ]              Close bracket
    5E    í        I     Lower-case i with acute accent
    5F    ó        O     Lower-case o with acute accent
    60    ú        U     Lower-case u with acute accent
    61    a        A     Lower-case a
    62    b        B     Lower-case b
    63    c        C     Lower-case c
    64    d        D     Lower-case d
    65    e        E     Lower-case e
    66    f        F     Lower-case f
    67    g        G     Lower-case g
    68    h        H     Lower-case h
    69    i        I     Lower-case i
    6A    j        J     Lower-case j
    6B    k        K     Lower-case k
    6C    l        L     Lower-case l
    6D    m        M     Lower-case m
    6E    n        N     Lower-case n
    6F    o        O     Lower-case o
    70    p        P     Lower-case p
    71    q        Q     Lower-case q
    72    r        R     Lower-case r
    73    s        S     Lower-case s
    74    t        T     Lower-case t
    75    u        U     Lower-case u
    76    v        V     Lower-case v
    77    w        W     Lower-case w
    78    x        X     Lower-case x
    79    y        Y     Lower-case y
    7A    z        Z     Lower-case z
    7B    ç        C     Lower-case c with cedilla
    7C    ÷              Division sign
    7D    Ñ              Upper-case N with tilde
    7E    ñ        Ñ     Lower-case n with tilde
    7F    ∎              Solid block

   (h) Character Attributes —(1) Transmission of Attributes. A character may be
   transmitted with any or all of four attributes: Color, italics, underline,
   and flash. All of these attributes are set by control codes included in the
   received data. An attribute will remain in effect until changed by another
   control code or until the end of the row is reached. Each row begins with a
   control  code  which  sets  the color and underline attributes. (White
   non-underlined is the default display attribute if no Preamble Address Code
   is received before the first character on an empty row.) Attributes are not
   affected by transparent spaces within a row.

   (i) All Mid-Row Codes and the Flash On command are spacing attributes which
   appear in the display just as if a standard space (20h) had been received.
   Preamble Address Codes are non-spacing and will not alter any attributes
   when used to position the cursor in the midst of a row of characters.

   (ii) The color attribute has the highest priority and can only be changed by
   the Mid-Row Code of another color. Italics has the next highest priority. If
   characters with both color and italics are desired, the italics Mid-Row Code
   must follow the color assignment. Any color Mid-Row Code will turn off
   italics. If the least significant bit of a Preamble Address Code or of a
   color or italics Mid-Row Code is a 1 (high), underlining is turned on. If
   that bit is a 0 (low), underlining is off.

   (iii) The flash attribute is transmitted as a Miscellaneous Control Code.
   The Flash On command will not alter the status of the color, italics, or
   underline attributes. However, any color or italics Mid-Row Code will turn
   off flash.

   (iv) Thus, for example, if a red, italicized, underlined, flashing character
   is desired, the attributes must be received in the following order: a red
   Mid-Row or Preamble Address Code, an italics Mid-Row Code with underline
   bit, and the Flash On command. The character will then be preceded by three
   spaces (two if red was assigned via a Preamble Address Code).

   (2) Display of attributes. The underline attribute will be displayed by
   drawing a line beneath the character in the same color as the character. The
   flash attribute will be displayed by causing the character to blink from the
   display at least once per second. The italic attribute must be capable of
   being displayed by either a special italic font, or by the modification of
   the standard font by slanting. The user may be given the option to select
   other methods of italic display as well. The support of the color attributes
   is optional. If the color attributes are supported, they will be displayed
   in the color they have been assigned. If color attributes are not supported,
   the display may be in color, but all color changes will be ignored.

   (i) Control codes. There are three different types of control codes used to
   identify  the format, location, attributes, and display of characters:
   Preamble Address Codes, Mid-Row Codes, and Miscellaneous Control Codes.

   (1)  Each  control  code  consists of a pair of bytes which are always
   transmitted together in a single field of line 21 and which are normally
   transmitted twice in succession to help insure correct reception of the
   control instructions. The first of the control code bytes is a non-printing
   character in the range 10h to 1Fh. The second byte is always a printing
   character in the range 20h to 7Fh. Any such control code pair received which
   has not been assigned a function is ignored. If the non-printing character
   in the pair is in the range 00h to 0Fh, that character alone will be ignored
   and the second character will be treated normally.

   (2) If the second byte of a control code pair does not contain odd parity
   (see paragraph (j) of this section), then the pair is ignored. The redundant
   transmission of the pair will be the instruction upon which the receiver
   acts.

   (3) If the first byte of the first transmission of a control code pair fails
   the parity check, then that byte is inserted into the currently active
   memory as a solid block character (7Fh) followed by whatever the second byte
   is. Again, the redundant transmission of the pair will be the controlling
   instruction.

   (4) If the first transmission of a control code pair passes parity, it is
   acted upon within one video frame. If the next frame contains a perfect
   repeat of the same pair, the redundant code is ignored. If, however, the
   next frame contains a different but also valid control code pair, this pair,
   too, will be acted upon (and the receiver will expect a repeat of this
   second pair in the next frame). If the first byte of the expected redundant
   control code pair fails the parity check and the second byte is identical to
   the  second  byte in the immediately preceding pair, then the expected
   redundant code is ignored. If there are printing characters in place of the
   redundant code, they will be processed normally.

   (5) There is provision for decoding a second data channel. The second data
   channel  is encoded with the same control codes and procedures already
   described. The first byte of every control code pair indicates the data
   channel (C1/C2) to which the command applies. Control codes which do not
   match the data channel selected by the user, and all subsequent data related
   to that control code, are ignored by the receiver.

   Mid-Row Codes
   Data channel 1 Data channel 2 Attribute description
           11  20         19  20 White.
           11  21         19  21 White Underline.
           11  22         19  22 Green.
           11  23         19  23 Green Underline.
           11  24         19  24 Blue.
           11  25         19  25 Blue Underline.
           11  26         19  26 Cyan.
           11  27         19  27 Cyan Underline.
           11  28         19  28 Red.
           11  29         19  29 Red Underline.
           11  2A         19  2A Yellow.
           11  2B         19  2B Yellow Underline.
           11  2C         19  2C Magenta.
           11  2D         19  2D Magenta Underline.
           11  2E         19  2E Italics.
           11  2F         19  2F Italics Underline.

   Miscellaneous Control Codes
   Data channel 1 Data channel 2 Mne-
   monic Command description
   14  20 1C  20 RCL Resume caption loading.
   14  21 1C  21 BS Backspace.
   14  22 1C  22 AOF Reserved (formerly Alarm Off).
   14  23 1C  23 AON Reserved (formerly Alarm On).
   14  24 1C  24 DER Delete to End of Row.
   14  25 1C  25 RU2 Roll-Up Captions–2 Rows.
   14  26 1C  26 RU3 Roll-Up Captions–3 Rows.
   14  27 1C  27 RU4 Roll-Up Captions–4 Rows.
   14  28 1C  28 FON Flash On.
   14  29 1C  29 RDC Resume Direct Captioning.
   14  2A 1C  2A TR Text Restart.
   14  2B 1C  2B RTD Resume Text Display.
   14  2C 1C  2C EDM Erase Displayed Memory.
   14  2D 1C  2D CR Carriage Return.
   14  2E 1C  2E ENM Erase Non-Displayed Memory.
   14  2F 1C  2F EOC End of Caption (Flip Memories).
   17  21 1F  21 TO1 Tab Offset 1 Column.
   17  22 1F  22 TO2 Tab Offset 2 Columns.
   17  23 1F  23 TO3 Tab Offset 3 Columns.

   Preamble Address Codes
      Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 5 Row 6 Row 7 Row 8 Row 9 Row 10 Row 11 Row
   12 Row 13 Row 14 Row 15
   First byte of code pair:
   Data Channel 1 11 11 12 12 15 15 16 16 17 17 10 13 13 14 14
   Data Channel 2 19 19 1A 1A 1D 1D 1E 1E 1F 1F 18 1B 1B 1C 1C
   Second byte of code pair:
   White 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 40 60 40 60
   White Underline 41 61 41 61 41 61 41 61 41 61 41 41 61 41 61
   Green 42 62 42 62 42 62 42 62 42 62 42 42 62 42 62
   Green Underline 43 63 43 63 43 63 43 63 43 63 43 43 63 43 63
   Blue 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 44 64 44 64
   Blue Underline 45 65 45 65 45 65 45 65 45 65 45 45 65 45 65
   Cyan 46 66 46 66 46 66 46 66 46 66 46 46 66 46 66
   Cyan Underline 47 67 47 67 47 67 47 67 47 67 47 47 67 47 67
   Red 48 68 48 68 48 68 48 68 48 68 48 48 68 48 68
   Red Underline 49 69 49 69 49 69 49 69 49 69 49 49 69 49 69
   Yellow 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 4A 6A 4A 6A
   Yellow Underline 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 4B 68 4B 6B
   Magenta 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 4C 6C 4C 6C
   Magenta Underline 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 4D 6D 4D 6D
   White Italics 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 4E 6E 4E 6E
   White Italics Underline 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 4F 6F 4F 6F
   Indent 0 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 50 70 50 70
   Indent 0 Underline 51 71 51 71 51 71 51 71 51 71 51 51 71 51 71
   Indent 4 52 72 52 72 52 72 52 72 52 72 52 52 72 52 72
   Indent 4 Underline 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 53 73 53 73
   Indent 8 54 74 54 74 54 74 54 74 54 74 54 54 74 54 74
   Indent 8 Underline 55 75 55 75 55 75 55 75 55 75 55 55 75 55 75
   Indent 12 56 76 56 76 56 76 56 76 56 76 56 56 76 56 76
   Indent 12 Underline 57 77 57 77 57 77 57 77 57 77 57 57 77 57 77
   Indent 16 58 78 58 78 58 78 58 78 58 78 58 58 78 58 78
   Indent 16 Underline 59 79 59 79 59 79 59 79 59 79 59 59 79 59 79
   Indent 20 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 5A 7A 5A 7A
   Indent 20 Underline 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 5B 7B 5B 7B
   Indent 24 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 5C 7C 5C 7C
   Indent 24 Underline 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 5D 7D 5D 7D
   Indent 28 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 5E 7E 5E 7E
   Indent 28 Underline 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 5F 7F 5F 7F

   Note: All indent codes (second byte equals 50h–5fh, 70th–7fh) assign white
   as the color attribute.

   (j) Data rejection. The receiver should provide an effective procedure to
   verify data. A receiver will reject data if the data is invalid, or if the
   data is directed to the data channel or field not selected by the user.
   Invalid data is any data that fails to pass a check for odd parity, or
   which, having passed the parity check, is assigned no function.

   (1) If a print character fails to pass a check for parity, a solid block
   (7Fh) should be displayed in place of the failed character. In addition,
   valid  data  can be corrupted in many ways and may not be suitable for
   display. For example, repeated fields, skipped fields and altered field
   sequences are all possible from consumer video equipment and might present
   meaningless captions.

   (2)  The receiver will ignore data rejected due to being directed to a
   deselected field or channel. However, this will not cause the display to be
   disabled.

   (k)  Automatic  display  enable/disable. The receiver shall provide an
   automatic enable/disable capability to prevent the display of invalid or
   incomplete data, when the user selects the Caption Mode. The display should
   automatically  become  enable  after the receiver verifies the data as
   described  in  paragraph  (j)  of  this  section.  The display will be
   automatically disabled when there is a sustained detection of invalid data.
   The display will be re-enabled when the data verification process has been
   satisfied once again.

   (l) Compatibility with Cable Security Systems. Certain cable television
   security techniques, such as signal encryption and copy protection, can
   alter the television signal so that some methods of finding line 21 will not
   work. In particular, counting of lines or timing from the start of the
   vertical blanking interval may cause problems. Caption decoding circuitry
   must function properly when receiving signals from cable security systems
   that were designed and marketed prior to April 5, 1991. Further information
   concerning such systems is available from the National Cable Television
   Association,  Inc., Washington, DC, and from the Electronic Industries
   Association, Washington, DC.

   (m)  Labelling and consumer information requirements. The box or other
   package in which the individual television receiver is to be marketed shall
   carry a statement in a prominent location, visible to the buyer before
   purchase, which reads as follows:

   This television receiver provides display of television closed captioning in
   accordance with §15.119 of the FCC rules.

   Receivers that do not support color attributes or text mode, as well as
   receivers that display only upper-case characters pursuant to paragraph (g)
   of this section, must include with the statement, and in the owner's manual,
   language indicating that those features are not supported.

   (n) Glossary of terms. The following terms are used to describe caption
   decoder specifications:

   (1) Base row: The bottom row of a roll-up display. The cursor always remains
   on  the  base  row. Rows of text roll upwards into the contiguous rows
   immediately above the base row.

   (2) Box: The area surrounding the active character display. In Text Mode,
   the  box is the entire screen area defined for display, whether or not
   displayable characters appear. In Caption Mode, the box is dynamically
   redefined by each caption and each element of displayable characters within
   a caption. The box (or boxes, in the case of a multiple-element caption)
   includes all the cells of the displayed characters, the non-transparent
   spaces between them, and one cell at the beginning and end of each row
   within a caption element in those decoders that use a solid space to improve
   legibility.

   (3) Caption window: The invisible rectangle which defines the top and bottom
   limits of a roll-up caption. The window can be 2 to 4 rows high. The lowest
   row of the window is called the base row.

   (4) Cell: The discrete screen area in which each displayable character or
   space may appear. A cell is one row high and one column wide.

   (5) Column: One of 32 vertical divisions of the screen, each of equal width,
   extending approximately across the full width of the safe caption area as
   defined in paragraph (n)(12) of this section. Two additional columns, one at
   the  left  of  the screen and one at the right, may be defined for the
   appearance of a box in those decoders which use a solid space to improve
   legibility, but no displayable characters may appear in those additional
   columns. For reference, columns may be numbered 0 to 33, with columns 1 to
   32 reserved for displayable characters.

   (6) Displayable character: Any letter, number or symbol which is defined for
   on-screen display, plus the 20h space.

   (7)  Display disable: To turn off the display of captions or text (and
   accompanying  background)  at  the receiver, rather than through codes
   transmitted on line 21 which unconditionally erase the display. The receiver
   may disable the display because the user selects an alternate mode, e.g., TV
   Mode, or because no valid line 21 data is present.

   (8) Display enable: To allow the display of captions or text when they are
   transmitted  on  line 21 and received as valid data. For display to be
   enabled, the user must have selected Caption Mode or Text Mode, and valid
   data for the selected mode must be present on line 21.

   (9) Element: In a pop-on or paint-on style caption, each contiguous area of
   cells containing displayable characters and non-transparent spaces between
   those characters. A single caption may have multiple elements. An element is
   not necessarily a perfect rectangle, but may include rows of differing
   widths.

   (10) Erase Display: In Caption Mode, to clear the screen of all characters
   (and accompanying background) in response to codes transmitted on line 21.
   (The caption service provider can accomplish the erasure either by sending
   an Erase Displayed Memory command or by sending an Erase Non-Displayed
   Memory command followed by an End of Caption command, effectively making a
   blank caption “appear”.) Display can also be erased by the receiver when the
   caption memory erasure conditions are met, such as the user changing TV
   channels.

   (11) Row: One of 15 horizontal divisions of the screen, extending across the
   full height of the safe caption area as defined in paragraph (n)(12) of this
   section.

   (12) Safe caption area: The area of the television picture within which
   captioning  and  text  shall  be displayed to ensure visibility of the
   information on the majority of home television receivers. The safe caption
   area is specified as shown in the following figure:
   [ec03jn91.009.gif]

   View or download PDF

   The dimensions of the above figure shall be as follows:
   Label Dimensions Percent of television picture height
   A Television picture height 100.0
   B Television picture width 133.33
   C Height of safe caption area 80.0
   D Width of safe caption area 106.67
   E Vertical position of safe caption area 10.0
   F Horizontal position of safe caption area 13.33

   (13) Special characters: Displayable characters (except for “transparent
   space”)  which require a two-byte sequence of one non-printing and one
   printing character. The non-printing byte varies depending on the data
   channel. Regular characters require unique one-byte codes which are the same
   in either data channel.

   (14) Text: When written with an upper-case “T”, refers to the Text Mode.
   When written with a lower-case “t”, refers to any combination of displayable
   characters.

   (15)  Transparent  space:  Transmitted as a special character, it is a
   one-column-wide space behind which program video is always visible (except
   when a transparent space immediately precedes or follows a displayable
   character and solid box is needed to make that character legible).

   [ 56 FR 27201 , June 13, 1991, as amended at  57 FR 19094 , May 4, 1992;  58 FR 44893 , Aug. 25, 1993]

§ 15.120   Program blocking technology requirements for television receivers.

   top

   (a) Effective July 1, 1999, manufacturers of television broadcast receivers
   as defined in section 15.3(w) of this chapter, including personal computer
   systems meeting that definition, must ensure that one-half of their product
   models with picture screens 33 cm (13 in) or larger in diameter shipped in
   interstate commerce or manufactured in the United States comply with the
   provisions of paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.

   Note: This paragraph places no restrictions on the shipping or sale of
   television receivers that were manufactured before July 1999.

   (b) Effective January 1, 2000, all TV broadcast receivers as defined in
   section 15.3(w) of this chapter, including personal computer systems meeting
   that definition, with picture screens 33 cm (13 in) or larger in diameter
   shipped in interstate commerce or manufactured in the United States shall
   comply with the provisions of paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.

   (c) Transmission format. (1) Analog television program rating information
   shall be transmitted on line 21 of field 2 of the vertical blanking interval
   of television signals, in accordance with §73.682(a)(22) of this chapter.

   (2) Digital television program rating information shall be transmitted in
   digital television signals in accordance with §73.682(d) of this chapter.

   (d) Operation. (1) Analog television receivers will receive program ratings
   transmitted pursuant to EIA–744: “Transport of Content Advisory Information
   Using Extended Data Service (XDS)” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38)
   and EIA–608: “Recommended Practice for Line 21 Data Service” (incorporated
   by reference, see §15.38). Blocking of programs shall occur when a program
   rating is received that meets the pre-determined user requirements.

   (2) Digital television receivers shall react in a similar manner as analog
   televisions when programmed to block specific rating categories. Effective
   March 15, 2006, digital television receivers will receive program rating
   descriptors transmitted pursuant to industry standard EIA/CEA–766–A “U.S.
   and Canadian Region Rating Tables (RRT) and Content Advisory Descriptors for
   Transport of Content Advisory Information using ATSC A/65–A Program and
   System Information Protocol (PSIP),” 2001 (incorporated by reference, see
   §15.38). Blocking of programs shall occur when a program rating is received
   that  meets  the  pre-determined user requirements. Digital television
   receivers shall be able to respond to changes in the content advisory rating
   system.

   (e) All television receivers as described in paragraph (a) of this section
   shall block programming as follows:

   (1) Channel Blocking. Channel Blocking should occur as soon as a program
   rating packet with the appropriate Content Advisory or MPAA rating level is
   received. Program blocking is described as a receiver performing all of the
   following:

   • Muting the program audio.

   • Rendering the video black or otherwise indecipherable.

   • Eliminating program-related captions.

   (2) Default State. The default state of a receiver (i.e., as provided to the
   consumer) should not block unrated programs. However, it is permissible to
   include features that allow the user to reprogram the receiver to block
   programs that are not rated.

   (3)  Picture-In-Picture (PIP). If a receiver has the ability to decode
   program-related rating information for the Picture-In-Picture (PIP) video
   signal, then it should block the PIP channel in the same manner as the main
   channel.  If  the  receiver  does  not  have the ability to decode PIP
   program-related  rating information, then it should block or otherwise
   disable the PIP if the viewer has enabled program blocking.

   (4) Selection of Ratings. Each television receiver, in accordance with user
   input, shall block programming based on the age based ratings, the content
   based ratings, or a combination of the two.

   (i) If the user chooses to block programming according to its age based
   rating level, the receiver must have the ability to automatically block
   programs with a more restrictive age based rating. For example, if all shows
   with an age-based rating of TV-PG have been selected for blocking, the user
   should be able to automatically block programs with the more restrictive
   ratings of TV–14 and TV-MA.

   (ii) If the user chooses to block programming according to a combination of
   age based and content based ratings the receiver must have the ability to
   automatically block programming with a more restrictive age rating but a
   similar content rating. For example, if all shows rated TV-PG-V have been
   selected for blocking, the user should be able to block automatically shows
   with the more restrictive ratings of TV–14–V and TV-MA-V.

   (iii)  The user should have the capability of overriding the automatic
   blocking described in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and (4)(ii) of this section.

   [ 63 FR 20133 , Apr. 23, 1998, as amended at  68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003;  69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004;  69 FR 59534 , Oct. 4, 2004]

§ 15.121   Scanning receivers and frequency converters used with scanning
receivers.

   top

   (a) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, scanning receivers
   and  frequency  converters  designed or marketed for use with scanning
   receivers, shall:

   (1) Be incapable of operating (tuning), or readily being altered by the user
   to  operate,  within  the  frequency  bands  allocated to the Cellular
   Radiotelephone  Service in part 22 of this chapter (cellular telephone
   bands). Scanning receivers capable of “readily being altered by the user”
   include, but are not limited to, those for which the ability to receive
   transmissions in the cellular telephone bands can be added by clipping the
   leads of, or installing, a simple component such as a diode, resistor or
   jumper  wire; replacing a plug-in semiconductor chip; or programming a
   semiconductor chip using special access codes or an external device, such as
   a personal computer. Scanning receivers, and frequency converters designed
   for use with scanning receivers, also shall be incapable of converting
   digital cellular communication transmissions to analog voice audio.

   (2) Be designed so that the tuning, control and filtering circuitry is
   inaccessible.  The design must be such that any attempts to modify the
   equipment to receive transmissions from the Cellular Radiotelephone Service
   likely will render the receiver inoperable.

   (b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, scanning receivers
   shall reject any signals from the Cellular Radiotelephone Service frequency
   bands that are 38 dB or lower based upon a 12 dB SINAD measurement, which is
   considered the threshold where a signal can be clearly discerned from any
   interference that may be present.

   (c) Scanning receivers and frequency converters designed or marketed for use
   with scanning receivers, are not subject to the requirements of paragraphs
   (a) and (b) of this section provided that they are manufactured exclusively
   for, and marketed exclusively to, entities described in 18 U.S.C. 2512(2),
   or are marketed exclusively as test equipment pursuant to §15.3(dd).

   (d)  Modification of a scanning receiver to receive transmissions from
   Cellular  Radiotelephone Service frequency bands will be considered to
   constitute manufacture of such equipment. This includes any individual,
   individuals, entity or organization that modifies one or more scanners. Any
   modification  to a scanning receiver to receive transmissions from the
   Cellular Radiotelephone Service frequency bands voids the certification of
   the scanning receiver, regardless of the date of manufacture of the original
   unit. In addition, the provisions of §15.23 shall not be interpreted as
   permitting  modification  of  a scanning receiver to receiver Cellular
   Radiotelephone Service transmissions.

   (e)  Scanning receivers and frequency converters designed for use with
   scanning receivers shall not be assembled from kits or marketed in kit form
   unless they comply with the requirements in paragraph (a) through (c) of
   this section.

   (f)  Scanning  receivers shall have a label permanently affixed to the
   product, and this label shall be readily visible to the purchaser at the
   time of purchase. The label shall read as follows: WARNING: MODIFICATION OF
   THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED
   UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.

   (1) “Permanently affixed” means that the label is etched, engraved, stamped,
   silkscreened,  indelible  printed or otherwise permanently marked on a
   permanently attached part of the equipment or on a nameplate of metal,
   plastic or other material fastened to the equipment by welding, riveting, or
   permanent  adhesive.  The label shall be designed to last the expected
   lifetime of the equipment in the environment in which the equipment may be
   operated  and must not be readily detachable. The label shall not be a
   stick-on, paper label.

   (2) When the device is so small that it is not practicable to place the
   warning label on it, the information required by this paragraph shall be
   placed  in  a prominent location in the instruction manual or pamphlet
   supplied to the user and shall also be placed on the container in which the
   device is marketed. However, the FCC identifier must be displayed on the
   device.

   [ 64 FR 22561 , Apr. 27, 1999, as amended at  66 FR 32582 , June 15, 2001]

§ 15.122   Closed caption decoder requirements for digital television receivers
and converter boxes.

   top

   (a)(1) Effective July 1, 2002, all digital television receivers with picture
   screens in the 4:3 aspect ratio with picture screens measuring 13 inches or
   larger diagonally, all digital television receivers with picture screens in
   the 16:9 aspect ratio measuring 7.8 inches or larger vertically and all
   separately sold DTV tuners shipped in interstate commerce or manufactured in
   the United States shall comply with the provisions of this section.

   Note  to paragraph(a)(1): This paragraph places no restrictions on the
   shipping or sale of digital television receivers that were manufactured
   before July 1, 2002.

   (2)  Effective  July 1, 2002, DTV converter boxes that allow digitally
   transmitted television signals to be displayed on analog receivers shall
   pass available analog caption information to the attached receiver in a form
   recognizable by that receiver's built-in caption decoder circuitry.

   Note  to paragraph(a)(2): This paragraph places no restrictions on the
   shipping or sale of DTV converter boxes that were manufactured before July
   1, 2002.

   (b) Digital television receivers and tuners must be capable of decoding
   closed captioning information that is delivered pursuant to EIA–708–B:
   “Digital Television (DTV) Closed Captioning” (incorporated by reference, see
   §15.38).

   (c) Services. (1) Decoders must be capable of decoding and processing data
   for the six standard services, Caption Service #1 through Caption Service
   #6.

   (2) Decoders that rely on Program and System Information Protocol data to
   implement  closed captioning functions must be capable of decoding and
   processing the Caption Service Directory data. Such decoders must be capable
   of decoding all Caption Channel Block Headers consisting of Standard Service
   Headers, Extended Service Block Headers, and Null Block headers. However,
   decoding of the data is required only for Standard Service Blocks (Service
   IDs <-6), and then only if the characters for the corresponding language are
   supported. The decoders must be able to display the directory for services 1
   through 6.

   (d) Code space organization. (1) Decoders must support Code Space C0, G0,
   C1, and G1 in their entirety.
   [er29se00.000.gif]

   View or download PDF

   (2) The following characters within code space G2 must be supported:

   (i) Transparent space ([TSP]).

   (ii) Non-breaking transparent space ([NBTSP]).

   (iii) Solid block ( ).

   (iv) Trademark symbol (^TM ).

   (v) Latin-1 characters Š, Œ, š, œ, Ÿ.

   (3)  The substitutions in Table 2 are to be made if a decoder does not
   support the remaining G2 characters.

   Table 2—G2 Character Substitution Table
   G2 Character Substitute with
   Open single quote (‘), G2 char code 0×31 G0 single quote (`), char code 0×27
   Close single quote (’), G2 char code 0×32 G0 single quote ('), char code
   0×27
   Open double quote (“), G2 char code 0×33 G0 double quote (“), char code 0×22
   Close double quote (”), G2 char code 0×34 G0 double quote (”), char code
   0×22
   Bold bullet (•), G2 char code 0×35 G1 bullet (•), char code 0×B7
   Elipsis (. . .), G2 char code 0×25 G0 underscore (_), char code 0×5F
   One-eighth ( 1/8), G2 char code 0×76 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
   Three-eighths ( 3/8), G2 char code 0×77 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
   Five-eighths ( 5/8), G2 char code 0×78 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
   Seven-eighths ( 7/8), G2 char code 0×79 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
   Vertical border (|), G2 char code 0×7A G0 stroke (|), char code 0×7C
   Upper-right border (⌉), G2 char code 0×7B G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
   Lower-left border (⌊), G2 char code 0×7C G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
   Horizontal border (―), G2 char code 0×7D G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
   Lower-right border (⌋), G2 char code 0×7E G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
   Upper-left border (⌈), G2 char code 0×7F G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D

   (4) Support for code spaces C2, C3, and G3 is optional. All unsupported
   graphic symbols in the G3 code space are to be substituted with the G0
   underscore character (_), char code 0×5F.

   (e) Screen coordinates. Table 3 specifies the screen coordinate resolutions
   and limits for anchor point positioning in 4:3 and 16:9 display formats, and
   the number of characters per row.

   Table 3—Screen Coordinate Resolutions and Limits
   Screen aspect ratio Maximum anchor position resolution Minimum anchor
   position resolution Maximum displayed rows Maximum characters per row
   4:3 75v×160h 15v×32h 4 32
   16:9 75v×210h 15v×42h 4 42
   Other 75v×(5×H) 15v×H* 4 ^1

   ^1H = 32 × (the width of the screen in relation to a 4:3 display). For
   example, the 16:9 format is 1/3 wider than a 4:3 display; thus, H = 32 * 4/3
   = 42.667, or 42.

   (1) This means that the minimum grid resolution for a 4:3 aspect ratio
   instrument is 15 vertical positions × 32 horizontal positions. This minimum
   grid resolution for 16:9 ratio instrument is 15 vertical positions × 42
   horizontal positions. These minimum grid sizes are to cover the entire
   safe-title area of the corresponding screen.

   (2)  The  minimum  coordinates  equate to a1/5reduction in the maximum
   horizontal and vertical grid resolution coordinates. Caption providers are
   to use the maximum coordinate system values when specifying anchor point
   positions. Decoders using the minimum resolution are to divide the provided
   horizontal and vertical screen coordinates by 5 to derive the equivalent
   minimum coordinates.

   (3) Any caption targeted for both 4:3 and 16:9 instruments is limited to 32
   contiguous characters per row. If a caption is received by a 4:3 instrument
   that is targeted for a 16:9 display only, or requires a window width greater
   than 32 characters, then the caption may be completely disregarded by the
   decoder. 16:9 instruments should be able to process and display captions
   intended for 4:3 displays, providing all other minimum recommendations are
   met.

   (4) If the resulting size of any window is larger than the safe title area
   for the corresponding display's aspect ratio, then this window will be
   completely disregarded.

   (f) Caption windows. (1) Decoders need to display no more than 4 rows of
   captions  on the screen at any given time, regardless of the number of
   windows displayed. This implies that no more than 4 windows can be displayed
   at any given time (with each having only one caption row). However, decoders
   should maintain storage to support a minimum total of 8 rows of captions.
   This storage is needed for the worst-case support of a displayed window with
   4 rows of captioning and a non-displayed window which is buffering the
   incoming rows for the next 4-row caption. As implied above, the maximum
   number of windows that may be displayed at any one time by a minimum decoder
   implementation is 4. If more than 4 windows are defined in the caption
   stream, the decoder may disregard the youngest and lowest priority window
   definition(s). Caption providers must be aware of this limitation, and
   either restrict the total number of windows used or accept that some windows
   will not be displayed.

   (2) Decoders do not need to support overlapped windows. If a window overlaps
   another window, the overlapped window need not be displayed by the decoder.

   (3)  At a minimum, decoders will assume that all windows have rows and
   columns  “locked”. This implies that if a decoder implements the SMALL
   pen-size, then word-“un”wrapping, when shrinking captions, need not be
   implemented. Also, if a decoder implements the LARGE pen size, then word
   wrapping (when enlarging captions) need not be implemented.

   (4) Whenever possible, the receiver should render embedded carriage returns
   as line breaks, since these carriage returns indicate an important aspect of
   the caption's formatting as determined by the service provider. However, it
   may sometimes be necessary for the receiver to ignore embedded line breaks.
   For example, if a caption is to appear in a larger font, and if its window's
   rows and/or columns are unlocked, the rows of text may need to become longer
   or shorter to fit within the allocated space. Such automatic reformatting of
   a caption is known as “word wrap.” If decoders support word-wrapping, it
   must be implemented as follows:

   (i)  The  receiver  should  follow  standard typographic practice when
   implementing word wrap. Potential breaking points (word-wrapping points) are
   indicated by the space character (20h) and by the hyphen character (2Dh).

   (ii) If a row is to be broken at a space, the receiver should remove the
   space from the caption display. If a row is to be broken after a hyphen, the
   hyphen should be retained.

   (iii) If an embedded return is to be removed, it should usually be replaced
   with a space. However, if the character to the left of the embedded return
   is a hyphen, the embedded return should be removed but NOT replaced with a
   space.

   (iv) This specification does not include optional hyphens, nor does it
   provide for any form of automatic hyphenation. No non-breaking hyphen is
   defined.  The  non-breaking  space  (A0h  in  the G1 code set) and the
   non-breaking  transparent space (21h in the G2 code set) should not be
   considered as potential line breaks.

   (v) If a single word exceeds the length of a row, the word should be placed
   at  the start of a new row, broken at the character following the last
   character that fits on the row, and continued with further breaks if needed.

   (g)  Window  text  painting. (1) All decoders should implement “left”,
   “right”, and “center” caption-text justification. Implementation of “full”
   justification is optional. If “full” justification is not implemented, fully
   justified captions should be treated as though they are “left” justified.

   (i) For “left” justification, decoders should display any portion of a
   received  row  of text when it is received. For “center”, “right”, and
   “full” justification, decoders may display any portion of a received row of
   text when it is received, or may delay display of a received row of text
   until reception of a row completion indicator. A row completion indicator is
   defined as receipt of a CR, ETX or any other command, except SetPenColor,
   SetPenAttributes, or SetPenLocation where the pen relocation is within the
   same row.

   (ii) Receipt of a character for a displayed row which already contains text
   with “center”, “right” or “full” justification will cause the row to be
   cleared  prior  to the display of the newly received character and any
   subsequent characters. Receipt of a justification command which changes the
   last received justification for a given window will cause the window to be
   cleared.

   (2) At a minimum, decoders must support LEFT_TO_RIGHT printing.

   (3) At a minimum, decoders must support BOTTOM_TO_TOP scrolling. For windows
   sharing the same horizontal scan lines on the display, scrolling may be
   disabled.

   (4) At a minimum, decoders must support the same recommended practices for
   scroll rate as is provided for NTSC closed-captioning.

   (5) At a minimum, decoders must support the same recommended practices for
   smooth scrolling as is provided for NTSC closed-captioning.

   (6) At a minimum, decoders must implement the “snap” window display effect.
   If  the window “fade” and “wipe” effects are not implemented, then the
   decoder will “snap” all windows when they are to be displayed, and the
   “effect speed” parameter is ignored.

   (h)  Window  colors and borders. At a minimum, decoders must implement
   borderless windows with solid, black backgrounds (i.e., border type = NONE,
   fill color = (0,0,0), fill opacity = SOLID), and borderless transparent
   windows (i.e., border type = NONE, fill opacity = TRANSPARENT).

   (i) Predefined window and pen styles. Predefined Window Style and Pen Style
   ID's may be provided in the DefineWindow command. At a minimum, decoders
   should implement Predefined Window Attribute Style 1 and Predefined Pen
   Attribute Style 1, as shown in Table 4 and Table 5, respectively.

   Table 4—Predefined Window Style ID's
   Style ID # Justify Print direction Scroll
   direction Word wrap Display
   effect Effect
   direction Effect
   speed Fill color Fill opacity Border type Border color Usage
   1 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top No Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
   n/a NTSC Style PopUp Captions
   2 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top No Snap n/a n/a n/a Transparent None n/a
   PopUp Captions w/o Black Background
   3 Cntr Left-to-right Bottom-to-top No Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
   n/a NTSC Style Centered PopUp Captions
   4 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top Yes Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
   n/a NTSC Style RollUp Captions
   5 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top Yes Snap n/a n/a n/a Transparent None n/a
   RollUp Captions w/o Black Background
   6 Cntr Left-to-right Bottom-to-top Yes Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
   n/a NTSC Style Centered RollUp Captions
   7 Left Top-to-bottom Right-to-left No Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
   n/a Ticker Tape

   Table 5—Predefined Pen Style ID's
   Predefined style ID Pen size Font style Offset Italics Underline Edge type
   Foregrnd color Foregrnd opacity Backgrnd color Backgrnd opacity Edge color
   Usage
   1 Stndr 0 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a
   Default NTSC Style*
   2 Stndr 1 Normal No No None (2,2,2) Solid (0,0,0) White Solid n/a NTSC
   Style* Mono w/Serif
   3 Stndr 2 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a NTSC
   Style* Prop w/ Serif
   4 Stndr 3 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a NTSC
   Style* Mono w/o Serif
   5 Stndr 4 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a NTSC
   Style* Prop w/o Serif
   6 Stndr 3 Normal No No Unifrm (2,2,2) White Solid n/a Transparent (0,0,0)
   Black Mono w/o Serif, Bordered Text, No BG
   7 Stndr 4 Normal No No Unifrm (2,2,2) White Solid n/a Transparent (0,0,0)
   Black Prop. w/o Serif, Bordered Text, No BG

   *“NTSC Style”—White Text on Black Background

   (j) Pen size. (1) Decoders must support the standard, large, and small pen
   sizes and must allow the caption provider to choose a pen size and allow the
   viewer  to choose an alternative size. The STANDARD pen size should be
   implemented such that the height of the tallest character in any implemented
   font is no taller than1/15of the height of the safe-title area, and the
   width  of the widest character is no wider than1/32of the width of the
   safe-title area for 4:3 displays and1/42of the safe-title area width for
   16:9 displays.

   (2) The LARGE pen size should be implemented such that the width of the
   widest  character  in  any implemented font is no wider than1/32of the
   safe-title area for 16:9 displays. This recommendation allows for captions
   to grow to a LARGE pen size without having to reformat the caption since no
   caption will have more than 32 characters per row.

   (k) Font styles. (1) Decoders must support the eight fonts listed below.
   Caption providers may specify 1 of these 8 font styles to be used to write
   caption text. The styles specified in the “font style” parameter of the
   SetPenAttributes command are numbered from 0 through 7. The following is a
   list of the 8 required font styles. For information purposes only, each font
   style references one or more popular fonts which embody the characteristics
   of the style:

   (i) 0—Default (undefined)

   (ii) 1—Monospaced with serifs (similar to Courier)

   (iii) 2—Proportionally spaced with serifs (similar to Times New Roman)

   (iv) 3—Monospaced without serifs (similar to Helvetica Monospaced)

   (v) 4—Proportionally spaced without serifs (similar to Arial and Swiss)

   (vi) 5—Casual font type (similar to Dom and Impress)

   (vii) 6—Cursive font type (similar to Coronet and Marigold)

   (viii) 7—Small capitals (similar to Engravers Gothic)

   (2)  Font  styles may be implemented in any typeface which the decoder
   manufacturer deems to be a readable rendition of the font style, and need
   not be in the exact typefaces given in the example above. Decoders must
   include the ability for consumers to choose among the eight fonts. The
   decoder must display the font chosen by the caption provider unless the
   viewer chooses a different font.

   (l)  Character  offsetting.  Decoders need not implement the character
   offsetting ( i.e., subscript and superscript) pen attributes.

   (m) Pen styles. At a minimum, decoders must implement normal, italic, and
   underline pen styles.

   (n) Foreground color and opacity. (1) At a minimum, decoders must implement
   transparent, translucent, solid and flashing character foreground type
   attributes.

   (2) At a minimum, decoders must implement the following character foreground
   colors: white, black, red, green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan.

   (3) Caption providers may specify the color/opacity. Decoders must include
   the ability for consumers to choose among the color/opacity options. The
   decoder must display the color/opacity chosen by the caption provider unless
   the viewer chooses otherwise.

   (o) Background color and opacity. (1) Decoders must implement the following
   background colors: white, black, red, green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan.
   It is recommended that this background is extended beyond the character
   foreground to a degree that the foreground is separated from the underlying
   video by a sufficient number of background pixels to insure the foreground
   is separated from the background.

   (2) Decoders must implement transparent, translucent, solid and flashing
   background type attributes. Caption providers may specify the color/opacity.
   Decoders  must  include  the ability for consumers to choose among the
   color/opacity options. The decoder must display the color/opacity chosen by
   the caption provider unless the viewer chooses otherwise.

   (p) Character edges. Decoders must implement separate edge color and type
   attribute control.

   (q) Color representation. (1) At a minimum, decoders must support the 8
   colors listed in Table 6.

   Table 6—Minimum Color List Table
    Color  Red Green Blue
   Black     0     0    0
   White     2     2    2
   Red       2     0    0
   Green     0     2    0
   Blue      0     0    2
   Yellow    2     2    0
   Magenta   2     0    2
   Cyan      0     2    2

   (2)(i) When a decoder supporting this Minimum Color List receives an RGB
   value not in the list, it will map the received value to one of the values
   in the list via the following algorithm:

   (A) All one (1) values are to be changed to 0.

   (B) All two (2) values are to remain unchanged.

   (C) All three (3) values are to be changed to 2.

   (ii) For example, the RGB value (1,2,3) will be mapped to (0,2,2), (3,3,3)
   will be mapped to (2,2,2) and (1,1,1) will be mapped to (0,0,0).

   (3) Table 7 is an alternative minimum color list table supporting 22 colors.

   Table 7—Alternative Minimum Color List Table
       Color      Red Green Blue
   Black            0     0    0
   Gray             1     1    1
   White            2     2    2
   Bright White     3     3    3
   Dark Red         1     0    0
   Red              2     0    0
   Bright Red       3     0    0
   Dark Green       0     1    0
   Green            0     2    0
   Bright Green     0     3    0
   Dark Blue        0     0    1
   Blue             0     0    2
   Bright Blue      0     0    3
   Dark Yellow      1     1    0
   Yellow           2     2    0
   Bright Yellow    3     3    0
   Dark Magenta     1     0    1
   Magenta          2     0    2
   Bright Magenta   3     0    3
   Dark Cyan        0     1    1
   Cyan             0     2    2
   Bright Cyan      0     3    3

   (i) When a decoder supporting the Alternative Minimum Color List in Table 7
   receives an RGB value not in the list (i.e., an RGB value whose non-zero
   elements are not the same value), it will map the received value to one of
   the values in the list via the following algorithm:

   (A) For RGB values with all elements non-zero and different—e.g., (1,2,3),
   (3,2,1), and (2,1,3), the 1 value will be changed to 0, the 2 value will
   remain unchanged, and the 3 value will be changed to 2.

   (B)  For  RGB  values  with  all elements non-zero and with two common
   elements—e.g. (3,1,3), (2,1,2), and (2,2,3), if the common elements are 3
   and the uncommon one is 1, then the 1 elements is changed to 0; e.g. (3,1,3)
   → (3,0,3). If the common elements are 1 and the uncommon element is 3, then
   the 1 elements are changed to 0, and the 3 element is changed to 2; e.g.
   (1,3,1) → (0,2,0). In all other cases, the uncommon element is changed to
   the common value; e.g., (2,2,3) → (2,2,2), (1,2,1) → (1,1,1), and (3,2,3)
   → (3,3,3).

   (ii) All decoders not supporting either one of the two color lists described
   above, must support the full 64 possible RGB color value combinations.

   (r) Character rendition considerations. In NTSC Closed Captioning, decoders
   were required to insert leading and trailing spaces on each caption row.
   There were two reasons for this requirement:

   (1) To provide a buffer so that the first and last characters of a caption
   row do not fall outside the safe title area, and

   (2)  To provide a black border on each side of a character so that the
   “white” leading pixels of the first character on a row and the trailing
   “white”  pixels  of  the last character on a row do not bleed into the
   underlying video.

   (i) Since caption windows are required to reside in the safe title area of
   the DTV screen, reason 1 (above) is not applicable to DTVCC captions.

   (ii) The attributes available in the SetPenAttributes command for character
   rendition (e.g., character background and edge attributes) provide unlimited
   flexibility to the caption provider when describing caption text in an ideal
   decoder implementation. However, manufacturers need not implement all pen
   attributes.  Thus  it  is recommended that no matter what the level of
   implementation,  decoder  manufacturers  should  take into account the
   readability of all caption text against a variety of all video backgrounds,
   and  should  implement  some  automatic character delineation when the
   individual control of character foreground, background and edge is not
   supported.

   (s) Service synchronization. Service Input Buffers must be at least 128
   bytes in size. Caption providers must keep this lower limit in mind when
   following Delay commands with other commands and window text. In other
   words,  no  more  than  128 bytes of DTVCC commands and text should be
   transmitted  (encoded) before a pending Delay command's delay interval
   expires.

   (t) Settings. Decoders must include an option that permits a viewer to
   choose a setting that will display captions as intended by the caption
   provider (a default). Decoders must also include an option that allows a
   viewer's chosen settings to remain until the viewer chooses to alter these
   settings, including periods when the television is turned off.

   [ 65 FR 58471 , Sept. 29, 2000, as amended at  69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004]

§ 15.123   Labeling of digital cable ready products.

   top

   (a) The requirements of this section shall apply to unidirectional digital
   cable products. Unidirectional digital cable products are one-way devices
   that accept a Point of Deployment module (POD) and which include, but are
   not limited to televisions, set-top-boxes and recording devices connected to
   digital cable systems. Unidirectional digital cable products do not include
   interactive two-way digital television products.

   (b)  A unidirectional digital cable product may not be labeled with or
   marketed using the term “digital cable ready,” or other terminology that
   describes the device as “cable ready” or “cable compatible,” or otherwise
   indicates that the device accepts a POD or conveys the impression that the
   device is compatible with digital cable service unless it implements at a
   minimum the following features:

   (1) Tunes NTSC analog channels transmitted in-the-clear.

   (2) Tunes digital channels that are transmitted in compliance with SCTE 40
   2003  (formerly  DVS  313): “Digital Cable Network Interface Standard”
   (incorporated  by reference, see §15.38), provided, however, that with
   respect to Table B.11 of that standard, the phase noise requirement shall be
   –86 dB/Hz including both in-the-clear channels and channels that are subject
   to conditional access.

   (3) Allows navigation of channels based on channel information (virtual
   channel  map  and  source  names) provided through the cable system in
   compliance with ANSI/SCTE 65 2002 (formerly DVS 234): “Service Information
   Delivered  Out-of-Band  for Digital Cable Television” (incorporated by
   reference, see §15.38), and/or PSIP-enabled navigation (ANSI/SCTE 54 2003
   (formerly DVS 241): “Digital Video Service Multiplex and Transport System
   Standard for Cable Television” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38)).

   (4) Includes the POD-Host Interface specified in SCTE 28 2003 (formerly DVS
   295): “Host-POD Interface Standard” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38),
   and  SCTE  41  2003  (formerly  DVS 301): “POD Copy Protection System”
   (incorporated  by  reference, see §15.38), or implementation of a more
   advanced  POD-Host Interface based on successor standards. Support for
   Internet protocol flows is not required.

   (5) Responds to emergency alerts that are transmitted in compliance with
   ANSI/SCTE 54 2003 (formerly DVS 241): “Digital Video Service Multiplex and
   Transport System Standard for Cable Television” (incorporated by reference,
   see §15.38).

   (6) In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this
   section, a unidirectional digital cable television may not be labeled or
   marketed as digital cable ready or with other terminology as described in
   paragraph (b) of this section, unless it includes a DTV broadcast tuner as
   set forth in §15.117(i) and employs at least one specified interface in
   accordance with the following schedule:

   (i)  For 480p grade unidirectional digital cable televisions, either a
   DVI/HDCP, HDMI/HDCP, or 480p Y,Pb,Pr interface:

   (A) Models with screen sizes 36 inches and above: 50% of a manufacturer's or
   importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2004; 100% of such
   models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005.

   (B) Models with screen sizes 32 to 35 inches: 50% of a manufacturer's or
   importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005; 100% of such
   models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2006.

   (ii) For 720p/1080i grade unidirectional digital cable televisions, either a
   DVI/HDCP or HDMI/HDCP interface:

   (A) Models with screen sizes 36 inches and above: 50% of a manufacturer's or
   importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2004; 100% of such
   models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005.

   (B) Models with screen sizes 25 to 35 inches: 50% of a manufacturer's or
   importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005; 100% of such
   models manufactured or imported after July l, 2006.

   (C) Models with screen sizes 13 to 24 inches: 100% of a manufacturer's or
   importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2007.

   (c) Before a manufacturer's or importer's first unidirectional digital cable
   product may be labeled or marketed as digital cable ready or with other
   terminology as described in paragraph (b) of this section, the manufacturer
   or importer shall verify the device as follows:

   (1) The manufacturer or importer shall have a sample of its first model of a
   unidirectional digital cable product tested to show compliance with the
   procedures set forth in Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving
   Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma” (incorporated by reference,
   see §15.38) at a qualified test facility. The manufacturer or importer shall
   have any modifications to the product to correct failures of the procedures
   in Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance
   Checklist: PICS Proforma” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38) retested
   at a qualified test facility.

   (2) A qualified test facility is a facility representing cable television
   system operators serving a majority of the cable television subscribers in
   the United States or an independent laboratory with personnel knowledgeable
   with respect to the standards referenced in paragraph (b) of this section
   concerning   the  procedures  set  forth  in  Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903:
   “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma”
   (incorporated by reference, see §15.38).

   (3) Subsequent to the testing of its initial unidirectional digital cable
   product model, a manufacturer or importer is not required to have other
   models of unidirectional digital cable products tested at a qualified test
   facility for compliance with the procedures of Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903:
   “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma”
   (incorporated  by reference, see §15.38). However, the manufacturer or
   importer shall ensure that all subsequent models of unidirectional digital
   cable products comply with the procedures in the Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903:
   “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma”
   (incorporated by reference, see §15.38) and all other applicable rules and
   standards. The manufacturer or importer shall maintain records indicating
   such compliance in accordance with the verification procedure requirements
   in part 2, subpart J of this chapter. The manufacturer or importer shall
   further submit documentation verifying compliance with the procedures in the
   Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance
   Checklist: PICS Proforma” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38) to a
   facility representing cable television system operators serving a majority
   of the cable television subscribers in the United States.

   (d) Manufacturers and importers shall provide in appropriate post-sale
   material that describes the features and functionality of the product, such
   as the owner's guide, the following language: “This digital television is
   capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digital premium cable
   television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such
   programming. A security card provided by your cable operator is required to
   view encrypted digital programming. Certain advanced and interactive digital
   cable services such as video-on-demand, a cable operator's enhanced program
   guide and data-enhanced television services may require the use of a set-top
   box. For more information call your local cable operator.”

   [ 68 FR 66733 , Nov. 28, 2003]

Subpart C—Intentional Radiators

   top

§ 15.201   Equipment authorization requirement.

   top

   (a) Intentional radiators operated as carrier current systems, devices
   operated under the provisions of §§15.211, 15.213, and 15.221, and devices
   operating below 490 kHz in which all emissions are at least 40 dB below the
   limits in §15.209 shall be verified pursuant to the procedures in Subpart J
   of part 2 of this chapter prior to marketing.

   (b) Except as otherwise exempted in paragraph (c) of this section and in
   §15.23  of  this  part,  all intentional radiators operating under the
   provisions of this part shall be certificated by the Commission pursuant to
   the procedures in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter prior to marketing.

   (c) For devices such as perimeter protection systems which, in accordance
   with §15.31(d), are required to be measured at the installation site, each
   application for certification must be accompanied by a statement indicating
   that the system has been tested at three installations and found to comply
   at each installation. Until such time as certification is granted, a given
   installation  of  a  system  that  was measured for the submission for
   certification will be considered to be in compliance with the provisions of
   this chapter, including the marketing regulations in subpart I of part 2 of
   this  chapter,  if tests at that installation show the system to be in
   compliance  with the relevant technical requirements. Similarly, where
   measurements  must  be  performed  on  site  for  equipment subject to
   verification, a given installation that has been verified to demonstrate
   compliance  with  the applicable standards will be considered to be in
   compliance with the provisions of this chapter, including the marketing
   regulations in subpart I of part 2 of this chapter.

   (d)  For perimeter protection systems operating in the frequency bands
   allocated to television broadcast stations operating under part 73 of this
   chapter,  the  holder  of  the  grant  of certification must test each
   installation prior to initiation of normal operation to verify compliance
   with the technical standards and must maintain a list of all installations
   and records of measurements. For perimeter protection systems operating
   outside of the frequency bands allocated to television broadcast stations,
   upon receipt of a grant of certification, further testing of the same or
   similar type of system or installation is not required.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.202   Certified operating frequency range.

   top

   Client devices that operate in a master/client network may be certified if
   they have the capability of operating outside permissible part 15 frequency
   bands, provided they operate on only permissible part 15 frequencies under
   the control of the master device with which they communicate. Master devices
   marketed  within  the  United  States  must be limited to operation on
   permissible part 15 frequencies. Client devices that can also act as master
   devices must meet the requirements of a master device. For the purposes of
   this section, a master device is defined as a device operating in a mode in
   which  it has the capability to transmit without receiving an enabling
   signal. In this mode it is able to select a channel and initiate a network
   by sending enabling signals to other devices. A network always has at least
   one device operating in master mode. A client device is defined as a device
   operating in a mode in which the transmissions of the device are under
   control of the master. A device in client mode is not able to initiate a
   network.

   [ 70 FR 23040 , May 4, 2005]

§ 15.203   Antenna requirement.

   top

   An intentional radiator shall be designed to ensure that no antenna other
   than that furnished by the responsible party shall be used with the device.
   The use of a permanently attached antenna or of an antenna that uses a
   unique coupling to the intentional radiator shall be considered sufficient
   to comply with the provisions of this section. The manufacturer may design
   the unit so that a broken antenna can be replaced by the user, but the use
   of a standard antenna jack or electrical connector is prohibited. This
   requirement does not apply to carrier current devices or to devices operated
   under the provisions of §15.211, §15.213, §15.217, §15.219, or §15.221.
   Further, this requirement does not apply to intentional radiators that must
   be professionally installed, such as perimeter protection systems and some
   field disturbance sensors, or to other intentional radiators which, in
   accordance  with §15.31(d), must be measured at the installation site.
   However, the installer shall be responsible for ensuring that the proper
   antenna is employed so that the limits in this part are not exceeded.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 28762 , July 13, 1990]

§ 15.204   External radio frequency power amplifiers and antenna modifications.

   top

   (a) Except as otherwise described in paragraphs (b) and (d) of this section,
   no person shall use, manufacture, sell or lease, offer for sale or lease
   (including advertising for sale or lease), or import, ship, or distribute
   for the purpose of selling or leasing, any external radio frequency power
   amplifier or amplifier kit intended for use with a part 15 intentional
   radiator.

   (b) A transmission system consisting of an intentional radiator, an external
   radio frequency power amplifier, and an antenna, may be authorized, marketed
   and used under this part. Except as described otherwise in this section,
   when a transmission system is authorized as a system, it must always be
   marketed as a complete system and must always be used in the configuration
   in which it was authorized.

   (c) An intentional radiator may be operated only with the antenna with which
   it is authorized. If an antenna is marketed with the intentional radiator,
   it shall be of a type which is authorized with the intentional radiator. An
   intentional radiator may be authorized with multiple antenna types.

   (1) The antenna type, as used in this paragraph, refers to antennas that
   have similar in-band and out-of-band radiation patterns.

   (2) Compliance testing shall be performed using the highest gain antenna for
   each type of antenna to be certified with the intentional radiator. During
   this testing, the intentional radiator shall be operated at its maximum
   available output power level.

   (3) Manufacturers shall supply a list of acceptable antenna types with the
   application for equipment authorization of the intentional radiator.

   (4) Any antenna that is of the same type and of equal or less directional
   gain as an antenna that is authorized with the intentional radiator may be
   marketed with, and used with, that intentional radiator. No retesting of
   this system configuration is required. The marketing or use of a system
   configuration that employs an antenna of a different type, or that operates
   at a higher gain, than the antenna authorized with the intentional radiator
   is not permitted unless the procedures specified in §2.1043 of this chapter
   are followed.

   (d) Except as described in this paragraph, an external radio frequency power
   amplifier  or  amplifier  kit  shall  be marketed only with the system
   configuration with which it was approved and not as a separate product.

   (1)  An  external  radio frequency power amplifier may be marketed for
   individual  sale provided it is intended for use in conjunction with a
   transmitter that operates in the 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and 5725–5850
   MHz bands pursuant to §15.247 of this part or a transmitter that operates in
   the 5.725–5.825 GHz band pursuant to §15.407 of this part. The amplifier
   must be of a design such that it can only be connected as part of a system
   in which it has been previously authorized. (The use of a non-standard
   connector or a form of electronic system identification is acceptable.) The
   output power of such an amplifier must not exceed the maximum permitted
   output power of its associated transmitter.

   (2) The outside packaging and user manual for external radio frequency power
   amplifiers sold in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section must
   include notification that the amplifier can be used only in a system which
   it has obtained authorization. Such a notice must identify the authorized
   system by FCC Identifier.

   [ 69 FR 54034 , Sept. 7, 2004]

§ 15.205   Restricted bands of operation.

   top

   (a)  Except  as  shown in paragraph (d) of this section, only spurious
   emissions are permitted in any of the frequency bands listed below:
          MHz                MHz              MHz          GHz
   0.090–0.110              16.42–16.423     399.9–410    4.5–5.15
   ^10.495–0.505       16.69475–16.69525       608–614   5.35–5.46
   2.1735–2.1905       16.80425–16.80475      960–1240   7.25–7.75
   4.125–4.128                25.5–25.67     1300–1427   8.025–8.5
   4.17725–4.17775            37.5–38.25   1435–1626.5     9.0–9.2
   4.20725–4.20775               73–74.6 1645.5–1646.5     9.3–9.5
   6.215–6.218                 74.8–75.2     1660–1710   10.6–12.7
   6.26775–6.26825            108–121.94 1718.8–1722.2  13.25–13.4
   6.31175–6.31225               123–138     2200–2300  14.47–14.5
   8.291–8.294              149.9–150.05     2310–2390  15.35–16.2
   8.362–8.366       156.52475–156.52525   2483.5–2500   17.7–21.4
   8.37625–8.38675           156.7–156.9     2690–2900 22.01–23.12
   8.41425–8.41475       162.0125–167.17     3260–3267   23.6–24.0
   12.29–12.293             167.72–173.2     3332–3339   31.2–31.8
   12.51975–12.52025             240–285   3345.8–3358  36.43–36.5
   12.57675–12.57725           322–335.4     3600–4400        (^2)
   13.36–13.41                                        

   ^1Until February 1, 1999, this restricted band shall be 0.490–0.510 MHz.

   ^2Above 38.6

   (b) Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, the field
   strength of emissions appearing within these frequency bands shall not
   exceed the limits shown in §15.209. At frequencies equal to or less than
   1000 MHz, compliance with the limits in §15.209 shall be demonstrated using
   measurement instrumentation employing a CISPR quasi-peak detector. Above
   1000  MHz,  compliance  with  the  emission limits in §15.209 shall be
   demonstrated based on the average value of the measured emissions. The
   provisions in §15.35 apply to these measurements.

   (c) Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, regardless
   of  the field strength limits specified elsewhere in this subpart, the
   provisions of this section apply to emissions from any intentional radiator.

   (d) The following devices are exempt from the requirements of this section:

   (1) Swept frequency field disturbance sensors operating between 1.705 and 37
   MHz  provided  their  emissions only sweep through the bands listed in
   paragraph  (a)  of  this  section, the sweep is never stopped with the
   fundamental  emission within the bands listed in paragraph (a) of this
   section, and the fundamental emission is outside of the bands listed in
   paragraph  (a) of this section more than 99% of the time the device is
   actively transmitting, without compensation for duty cycle.

   (2) Transmitters used to detect buried electronic markers at 101.4 kHz which
   are employed by telephone companies.

   (3) Cable locating equipment operated pursuant to §15.213.

   (4) Any equipment operated under the provisions of §§15.253, 15.255 or
   15.257.

   (5) Biomedical telemetry devices operating under the provisions of §15.242
   of this part are not subject to the restricted band 608–614 MHz but are
   subject to compliance within the other restricted bands.

   (6) Transmitters operating under the provisions of subparts D or F of this
   part.

   (7) Devices operated pursuant to §15.225 are exempt from complying with this
   section for the 13.36–13.41 MHz band only.

   (8) Devices operated in the 24.075–24.175 GHz band under §15.245 are exempt
   from complying with the requirements of this section for the 48.15–48.35 GHz
   and 72.22572.525 GHz bands only, and shall not exceed the limits specified
   in §15.245(b).

   (9) Devices operated in the 24.0–24.25 GHz band under §15.249 are exempt
   from complying with the requirements of this section for the 48.0–48.5 GHz
   and 72.072.75 GHz bands only, and shall not exceed the limits specified in
   §15.249(a).

   (e) Harmonic emissions appearing in the restricted bands above 17.7 GHz from
   field disturbance sensors operating under the provisions of §15.245 shall
   not exceed the limits specified in §15.245(b).

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 46791 , Nov. 7, 1990;  56 FR 6288 , Feb. 15, 1991;  57 FR 13048 , Apr. 15, 1992;  58 FR 33774 , June 21, 1993;
    60 FR 28068 , May 30, 1995;  61 FR 14503 , Apr. 2, 1996;  62 FR 4655 , Jan. 31,
   1997;  62 FR 58658 , Oct. 30, 1997;  67 FR 34855 , May 16, 2002;  68 FR 68546 ,
   Dec. 9, 2003;  69 FR 3265 , Jan. 23, 2004;  69 FR 72031 , Dec. 10, 2004]

§ 15.207   Conducted limits.

   top

   (a)  Except as shown in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, for an
   intentional radiator that is designed to be connected to the public utility
   (AC) power line, the radio frequency voltage that is conducted back onto the
   AC power line on any frequency or frequencies, within the band 150 kHz to 30
   MHz, shall not exceed the limits in the following table, as measured using a
   50 μH/50 ohms line impedance stabilization network (LISN). Compliance with
   the provisions of this paragraph shall be based on the measurement of the
   radio frequency voltage between each power line and ground at the power
   terminal. The lower limit applies at the boundary between the frequency
   ranges.
   Frequency of emission (MHz) Conducted limit (dBμV)
                               Quasi-peak   Average
   0.15–0.5                    66 to 56*  56 to 46*
   0.5–5                       56         46
   5–30                        60         50

   *Decreases with the logarithm of the frequency.

   (b) The limit shown in paragraph (a) of this section shall not apply to
   carrier current systems operating as intentional radiators on frequencies
   below  30 MHz. In lieu thereof, these carrier current systems shall be
   subject to the following standards:

   (1) For carrier current system containing their fundamental emission within
   the frequency band 535–1705 kHz and intended to be received using a standard
   AM broadcast receiver: no limit on conducted emissions.

   (2) For all other carrier current systems: 1000 μV within the frequency band
   535–1705 kHz, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms LISN.

   (3) Carrier current systems operating below 30 MHz are also subject to the
   radiated emission limits in §15.205, §15.209, §15.221, §15.223, or §15.227,
   as appropriate.

   (c) Measurements to demonstrate compliance with the conducted limits are not
   required for devices which only employ battery power for operation and which
   do not operate from the AC power lines or contain provisions for operation
   while  connected  to the AC power lines. Devices that include, or make
   provisions for, the use of battery chargers which permit operating while
   charging, AC adapters or battery eliminators or that connect to the AC power
   lines indirectly, obtainig their power through another device which is
   connected to the AC power lines, shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
   with the conducted limits.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  56 FR 373 , Jan. 4, 1991;  57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992;  58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993;  67 FR 45671 , July 10, 2002]

§ 15.209   Radiated emission limits; general requirements.

   top

   (a) Except as provided elsewhere in this subpart, the emissions from an
   intentional radiator shall not exceed the field strength levels specified in
   the following table:
   Frequency (MHz) Field strength (microvolts/meter) Measurement distance
   (meters)
   0.009–0.490 2400/F(kHz) 300
   0.490–1.705 24000/F(kHz) 30
   1.705–30.0 30 30
   30–88 100** 3
   88–216 150** 3
   216–960 200** 3
   Above 960 500 3

   **Except  as  provided  in  paragraph  (g), fundamental emissions from
   intentional radiators operating under this section shall not be located in
   the  frequency bands 54–72 MHz, 76–88 MHz, 174–216 MHz or 470–806 MHz.
   However, operation within these frequency bands is permItted under other
   sections of this part, e.g., §§15.231 and 15.241.

   (b) In the emission table above, the tighter limit applies at the band
   edges.

   (c)  The  level of any unwanted emissions from an intentional radiator
   operating under these general provisions shall not exceed the level of the
   fundamental emission. For intentional radiators which operate under the
   provisions of other sections within this part and which are required to
   reduce their unwanted emissions to the limits specified in this table, the
   limits in this table are based on the frequency of the unwanted emission and
   not the fundamental frequency. However, the level of any unwanted emissions
   shall not exceed the level of the fundamental frequency.

   (d) The emission limits shown in the above table are based on measurements
   employing a CISPR quasi-peak detector except for the frequency bands 9–90
   kHz, 110–490 kHz and above 1000 MHz. Radiated emission limits in these three
   bands are based on measurements employing an average detector.

   (e) The provisions in §§15.31, 15.33, and 15.35 for measuring emissions at
   distances other than the distances specified in the above table, determining
   the frequency range over which radiated emissions are to be measured, and
   limiting peak emissions apply to all devices operated under this part.

   (f)  In accordance with §15.33(a), in some cases the emissions from an
   intentional radiator must be measured to beyond the tenth harmonic of the
   highest fundamental frequency designed to be emitted by the intentional
   radiator because of the incorporation of a digital device. If measurements
   above the tenth harmonic are so required, the radiated emissions above the
   tenth  harmonic shall comply with the general radiated emission limits
   applicable to the incorporated digital device, as shown in §15.109 and as
   based  on the frequency of the emission being measured, or, except for
   emissions contained in the restricted frequency bands shown in §15.205, the
   limit  on  spurious  emissions specified for the intentional radiator,
   whichever is the higher limit. Emissions which must be measured above the
   tenth harmonic of the highest fundamental frequency designed to be emitted
   by the intentional radiator and which fall within the restricted bands shall
   comply  with  the general radiated emission limits in §15.109 that are
   applicable to the incorporated digital device.

   (g) Perimeter protection systems may operate in the 54–72 MHz and 76–88 MHz
   bands  under the provisions of this section. The use of such perimeter
   protection  systems  is limited to industrial, business and commercial
   applications.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32339 , Aug. 7, 1989;  55 FR 18340 , May 2,
   1990;  62 FR 58658 , Oct. 30, 1997]

§ 15.211   Tunnel radio systems.

   top

   An  intentional radiator utilized as part of a tunnel radio system may
   operate on any frequency provided it meets all of the following conditions:

   (a)  Operation  of a tunnel radio system (intentional radiator and all
   connecting wires) shall be contained solely within a tunnel, mine or other
   structure  that provides attenuation to the radiated signal due to the
   presence of naturally surrounding earth and/or water.

   (b) Any intentional or unintentional radiator external to the tunnel, mine
   or other structure, as described in paragraph (a) of this section, shall be
   subject to the other applicable regulations contained within this part.

   (c)  The total electromagnetic field from a tunnel radio system on any
   frequency or frequencies appearing outside of the tunnel, mine or other
   structure described in paragraph (a) of this section, shall not exceed the
   limits shown in §15.209 when measured at the specified distance from the
   surrounding structure, including openings. Particular attention shall be
   paid to the emissions from any opening in the structure to the outside
   environment. When measurements are made from the openings, the distances
   shown in §15.209 refer to the distance from the plane of reference which
   fits the entire perimeter of each above ground opening.

   (d) The conducted limits in §15.207 apply to the radiofrequency voltage on
   the public utility power lines outside of the tunnel.

§ 15.212   Modular transmitters.

   top

   (a) Single modular transmitters consist of a completely self-contained
   radiofrequency  transmitter device that is typically incorporated into
   another product, host or device. Split modular transmitters consist of two
   components:  a  radio  front end with antenna (or radio devices) and a
   transmitter control element (or specific hardware on which the software that
   controls  the  radio  operation  resides). All single or split modular
   transmitters are approved with an antenna. All of the following requirements
   apply, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.

   (1) Single modular transmitters must meet the following requirements to
   obtain a modular transmitter approval.

   (i)  The radio elements of the modular transmitter must have their own
   shielding.  The  physical crystal and tuning capacitors may be located
   external to the shielded radio elements.

   (ii) The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if
   such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with part 15
   requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation.

   (iii) The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation.

   (iv) The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna and transmission
   system requirements of §§15.203, 15.204(b) and 15.204(c). The antenna must
   either be permanently attached or employ a “unique” antenna coupler (at all
   connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). The
   “professional  installation” provision of §15.203 is not applicable to
   modules but can apply to limited modular approvals under paragraph (b) of
   this section.

   (v) The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration,
   i.e. , the module must not be inside another device during testing for
   compliance with part 15 requirements. Unless the transmitter module will be
   battery powered, it must comply with the AC line conducted requirements
   found in §15.207. AC or DC power lines and data input/output lines connected
   to the module must not contain ferrites, unless they will be marketed with
   the module (see §15.27(a)). The length of these lines shall be the length
   typical of actual use or, if that length is unknown, at least 10 centimeters
   to insure that there is no coupling between the case of the module and
   supporting equipment. Any accessories, peripherals, or support equipment
   connected to the module during testing shall be unmodified and commercially
   available (see §15.31(i)).

   (vi) The modular transmitter must be equipped with either a permanently
   affixed  label or must be capable of electronically displaying its FCC
   identification number.

   (A) If using a permanently affixed label, the modular transmitter must be
   labeled  with  its  own  FCC  identification  number,  and, if the FCC
   identification number is not visible when the module is installed inside
   another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is
   installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This
   exterior label can use wording such as the following: “Contains Transmitter
   Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1” or “Contains FCC ID: XYZMODEL1.” Any similar
   wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either
   provide  such  a  label,  an  example of which must be included in the
   application  for  equipment  authorization,  or, must provide adequate
   instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the
   latter  case,  a  copy  of  these instructions must be included in the
   application for equipment authorization.

   (B)  If  the modular transmitter uses an electronic display of the FCC
   identification  number, the information must be readily accessible and
   visible  on  the  modular  transmitter or on the device in which it is
   installed.  If the module is installed inside another device, then the
   outside of the device into which the module is installed must display a
   label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording
   such as the following: “Contains FCC certified transmitter module(s).” Any
   similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The user manual
   must include instructions on how to access the electronic display. A copy of
   these  instructions  must be included in the application for equipment
   authorization.

   (vii)  The  modular transmitter must comply with any specific rules or
   operating requirements that ordinarily apply to a complete transmitter and
   the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to
   explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included
   in the application for equipment authorization.

   (viii) The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure
   requirements in its final configuration.

   (2) Split modular transmitters must meet the requirements in paragraph
   (a)(1) of this section, excluding paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(v), and
   the  following additional requirements to obtain a modular transmitter
   approval.

   (i) Only the radio front end must be shielded. The physical crystal and
   tuning capacitors may be located external to the shielded radio elements.
   The interface between the split sections of the modular system must be
   digital with a minimum signaling amplitude of 150 mV peak-to-peak.

   (ii)  Control  information and other data may be exchanged between the
   transmitter control elements and radio front end.

   (iii) The sections of a split modular transmitter must be tested installed
   in  a  host  device(s)  similar to that which is representative of the
   platform(s) intended for use.

   (iv) Manufacturers must ensure that only transmitter control elements and
   radio front end components that have been approved together are capable of
   operating together. The transmitter module must not operate unless it has
   verified that the installed transmitter control elements and radio front end
   have been authorized together. Manufacturers may use means including, but
   not limited to, coding in hardware and electronic signatures in software to
   meet these requirements, and must describe the methods in their application
   for equipment authorization.

   (b) A limited modular approval may be granted for single or split modular
   transmitters that do not comply with all of the above requirements, e.g. ,
   shielding, minimum signaling amplitude, buffered modulation/data inputs, or
   power supply regulation, if the manufacturer can demonstrate by alternative
   means  in the application for equipment authorization that the modular
   transmitter  meets  all  the applicable part 15 requirements under the
   operating conditions in which the transmitter will be used. Limited modular
   approval also may be granted in those instances where compliance with RF
   exposure rules is demonstrated only for particular product configurations.
   The applicant for certification must state how control of the end product
   into which the module will be installed will be maintained such that full
   compliance of the end product is always ensured.

   [ 72 FR 28893 , May 23, 2007]

   Effective Date Note:   At  72 FR 28893 , May 23, 2007, § 15.212 was added.
   This section contains information collection and recordkeeping requirements
   and will not become effective until approval has been given by the Office of
   Management and Budget.

§ 15.213   Cable locating equipment.

   top

   An intentional radiator used as cable locating equipment, as defined in
   §15.3(d),  may be operated on any frequency within the band 9–490 kHz,
   subject to the following limits: Within the frequency band 9 kHz, up to, but
   not  including,  45 kHz, the peak output power from the cable locating
   equipment shall not exceed 10 watts; and, within the frequency band 45 kHz
   to 490 kHz, the peak output power from the cable locating equipment shall
   not exceed one watt. If provisions are made for connection of the cable
   locating equipment to the AC power lines, the conducted limits in §15.207
   also apply to this equipment.

§ 15.214   Cordless telephones.

   top

   (a) For equipment authorization, a single application form, FCC Form 731,
   may be filed for a cordless telephone system, provided the application
   clearly identifies and provides data for all parts of the system to show
   compliance  with  the applicable technical requirements. When a single
   application  form is submitted, both the base station and the portable
   handset must carry the same FCC identifier. The application shall include a
   fee for certification of each type of transmitter and for certification, if
   appropriate, for each type of receiver included in the system.

   (b) A cordless telephone that is intended to be connected to the public
   switched telephone network shall also comply with the applicable regulations
   in part 68 of this chapter. A separate procedure for approval under part 68
   is required for such terminal equipment.

   (c) The label required under subpart A of this part shall also contain the
   following statement: “Privacy of communications may not be ensured when
   using this phone.”

   (d) Cordless telephones shall incorporate circuitry which makes use of a
   digital security code to provide protection against unintentional access to
   the public switched telephone network by the base unit and unintentional
   ringing by the handset. These functions shall operate such that each access
   of  the telephone network or ringing of the handset is preceded by the
   transmission of a code word. Access to the telephone network shall occur
   only if the code transmitted by the handset matches code set in the base
   unit.  Similarly,  ringing of the handset shall occur only if the code
   transmitted  by the base unit matches the code set in the handset. The
   security code required by this section may also be employed to perform other
   communications functions, such as providing telephone billing information.
   This security code system is to operate in accordance with the following
   provisions.

   (1) There must be provision for at least 256 possible discrete digital
   codes. Factory-set codes must be continuously varied over at least 256
   possible codes as each telephone is manufactured. The codes may be varied
   either randomly, sequentially, or using another systematic procedure.

   (2) Manufacturers must use one of the following approaches for facilitating
   variation in the geographic distribution of individual security codes:

   (i) Provide a means for the user to readily select from among at least 256
   possible discrete digital codes. The cordless telephone shall be either in a
   non-operable mode after manufacture until the user selects a security code
   or the manufacturer must continuously vary the initial security code as each
   telephone is produced.

   (ii) Provide a fixed code that is continuously varied among at least 256
   discrete digital codes as each telephone is manufactured.

   (iii) Provide a means for the cordless telephone to automatically select a
   different code from among at least 256 possible discrete digital codes each
   time it is activated.

   (iv) It is permissible to provide combinations of fixed, automatic, and
   user-selectable coding provided the above criteria are met.

   (3) A statement of the means and procedures used to achieve the required
   protection shall be provided in any application for equipment authorization
   of a cordless telephone.

   [ 56 FR 3785 , Jan. 31, 1991, as amended at  63 FR 36603 , July 7, 1998;  66 FR 7580 , Jan. 24, 2001]

Radiated Emission Limits, Additional Provisions

   top

§ 15.215   Additional provisions to the general radiated emission limitations.

   top

   (a) The regulations in §§15.217 through 15.257 provide alternatives to the
   general radiated emission limits for intentional radiators operating in
   specified  frequency  bands.  Unless  otherwise  stated,  there are no
   restrictions as to the types of operation permitted under these sections.

   (b) In most cases, unwanted emissions outside of the frequency bands shown
   in these alternative provisions must be attenuated to the emission limits
   shown in §15.209. In no case shall the level of the unwanted emissions from
   an intentional radiator operating under these additional provisions exceed
   the field strength of the fundamental emission.

   (c) Intentional radiators operating under the alternative provisions to the
   general emission limits, as contained in §§15.217 through 15.257 and in
   Subpart E of this part, must be designed to ensure that the 20 dB bandwidth
   of the emission, or whatever bandwidth may otherwise be specified in the
   specific rule section under which the equipment operates, is contained
   within the frequency band designated in the rule section under which the
   equipment is operated. The requirement to contain the designated bandwidth
   of the emission within the specified frequency band includes the effects
   from frequency sweeping, frequency hopping and other modulation techniques
   that may be employed as well as the frequency stability of the transmitter
   over expected variations in temperature and supply voltage. If a frequency
   stability is not specified in the regulations, it is recommended that the
   fundamental  emission  be  kept within at least the central 80% of the
   permitted  band  in  order  to minimize the possibility of out-of-band
   operation.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  62 FR 45333 , Aug. 27, 1997;  67 FR 34855 , May 16, 2002;  69 FR 3265 , Jan. 23, 2004;  70 FR 6774 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.217   Operation in the band 160–190 kHz.

   top

   (a) The total input power to the final radio frequency stage (exclusive of
   filament or heater power) shall not exceed one watt.

   (b) The total length of the transmission line, antenna, and ground lead (if
   used) shall not exceed 15 meters.

   (c) All emissions below 160 kHz or above 190 kHz shall be attenuated at
   least 20 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier. Determination of
   compliance  with  the  20 dB attenuation specification may be based on
   measurements at the intentional radiator's antenna output terminal unless
   the intentional radiator uses a permanently attached antenna, in which case
   compliance shall be demonstrated by measuring the radiated emissions.

§ 15.219   Operation in the band 510–1705 kHz.

   top

   (a) The total input power to the final radio frequency stage (exclusive of
   filament or heater power) shall not exceed 100 milliwatts.

   (b) The total length of the transmission line, antenna and ground lead (if
   used) shall not exceed 3 meters.

   (c) All emissions below 510 kHz or above 1705 kHz shall be attenuated at
   least 20 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier. Determination of
   compliance  with  the  20 dB attenuation specification may be based on
   measurements at the intentional radiator's antenna output terminal unless
   the intentional radiator uses a permanently attached antenna, in which case
   compliance shall be deomonstrated by measuring the radiated emissions.

§ 15.221   Operation in the band 525–1705 kHz.

   top

   (a) Carrier current systems and transmitters employing a leaky coaxial cable
   as the radiating antenna may operate in the band 525–1705 kHz provided the
   field strength levels of the radiated emissions do not exceed 15 uV/m, as
   measured at a distance of 47,715/(frequency in kHz) meters (equivalent to
   Lambda/2Pi) from the electric power line or the coaxial cable, respectively.
   The field strength levels of emissions outside this band shall not exceed
   the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

   (b) As an alternative to the provisions in paragraph (a) of this section,
   intentional radiators used for the operation of an AM broadcast station on a
   college  or  university campus or on the campus of any other education
   institution may comply with the following:

   (1) On the campus, the field strength of emissions appearing outside of this
   frequency band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits shown
   in §15.209 as measured from the radiating source. There is no limit on the
   field strength of emissions appearing within this frequency band, except
   that the provisions of §15.5 continue to comply.

   (2) At the perimeter of the campus, the field strength of any emissions,
   including those within the frequency band 525–1705 kHz, shall not exceed the
   general radiated emission in §15.209.

   (3) The conducted limits specified in §15.207 apply to the radio frequency
   voltage on the public utility power lines outside of the campus. Due to the
   large number of radio frequency devices which may be used on the campus,
   contributing to the conducted emissions, as an alternative to measuring
   conducted emissions outside of the campus, it is acceptable to demonstrate
   compliance with this provision by measuring each individual intentional
   radiator employed in the system at the point where it connects to the AC
   power lines.

   (c) A grant of equipment authorization is not required for intentional
   radiators operated under the provisions of this section. In lieu thereof,
   the  intentional  radiator  shall  be verified for compliance with the
   regulations in accordance with subpart J of part 2 of this chapter. This
   data shall be kept on file at the location of the studio, office or control
   room associated with the transmitting equipment. In some cases, this may
   correspond to the location of the transmitting equipment.

   (d) For the band 535–1705 kHz, the frequency of operation shall be chosen
   such that operation is not within the protected field strength contours of
   licensed AM stations.

   [ 56 FR 373 , Jan. 4, 1991]

§ 15.223   Operation in the band 1.705–10 MHz.

   top

   (a) The field strength of any emission within the band 1.70510.0 MHz shall
   not exceed 100 microvolts/meter at a distance of 30 meters. However, if the
   bandwidth of the emission is less than 10% of the center frequency, the
   field strength shall not exceed 15 microvolts/meter or (the bandwidth of the
   device  in kHz) divided by (the center frequency of the device in MHz)
   microvolts/meter at a distance of 30 meters, whichever is the higher level.
   For the purposes of this section, bandwidth is determined at the points 6 dB
   down from the modulated carrier. The emission limits in this paragraph are
   based on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The
   provisions in §15.35(b) for limiting peak emissions apply.

   (b) The field strength of emissions outside of the band 1.70510.0 MHz shall
   not exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

§ 15.225   Operation within the band 13.11014.010 MHz.

   top

   (a) The field strength of any emissions within the band 13.55313.567 MHz
   shall not exceed 15,848 microvolts/meter at 30 meters.

   (b) Within the bands 13.41013.553 MHz and 13.56713.710 MHz, the field
   strength  of any emissions shall not exceed 334 microvolts/meter at 30
   meters.

   (c) Within the bands 13.11013.410 MHz and 13.71014.010 MHz the field
   strength  of any emissions shall not exceed 106 microvolts/meter at 30
   meters.

   (d)  The  field  strength  of  any  emissions appearing outside of the
   13.110–14.010 MHz band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits
   in §15.209.

   (e) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
   ±0.01%  of the operating frequency over a temperature variation of −20
   degrees to +50 degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in
   the primary supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a
   temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment
   tests shall be performed using a new battery.

   (f) In the case of radio frequency powered tags designed to operate with a
   device authorized under this section, the tag may be approved with the
   device  or  be  considered  as  a  separate  device subject to its own
   authorization.  Powered  tags  approved  with  a device under a single
   application shall be labeled with the same identification number as the
   device.

   [ 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.227   Operation within the band 26.9627.28 MHz.

   top

   (a) The field strength of any emission within this band shall not exceed
   10,000 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is
   based on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The
   provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

   (b) The field strength of any emissions which appear outside of this band
   shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

§ 15.229   Operation within the band 40.6640.70 MHz.

   top

   (a)  Unless operating pursuant to the provisions in §15.231, the field
   strength  of  any  emissions  within  this band shall not exceed 1,000
   microvolts/meter at 3 meters.

   (b)  As  an alternative to the limit in paragraph (a) of this section,
   perimeter protection systems may demonstrate compliance with the following:
   the field strength of any emissions within this band shall not exceed 500
   microvolts/meter   at   3  meters,  as  determined  using  measurement
   instrumentations employing an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for
   limiting  peak  emissions  apply  where compliance of these devices is
   demonstrated under this alternative emission limit.

   (c) The field strength of any emissions appearing outside of this band shall
   not exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

   (d) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
   ±0.01%  of the operating frequency over a temperature variation of −20
   degrees to +50 degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in
   the primary supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a
   temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment
   tests shall be performed using a new battery.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 33910 , Aug. 20, 1990]

§ 15.231   Periodic operation in the band 40.6640.70 MHz and above 70 MHz.

   top

   (a) The provisions of this section are restricted to periodic operation
   within  the  band 40.6640.70 MHz and above 70 MHz. Except as shown in
   paragraph (e) of this section, the intentional radiator is restricted to the
   transmission of a control signal such as those used with alarm systems, door
   openers, remote switches, etc. Continuous transmissions, voice, video and
   the radio control of toys are not permitted. Data is permitted to be sent
   with a control signal. The following conditions shall be met to comply with
   the provisions for this periodic operation:

   (1)  A  manually  operated transmitter shall employ a switch that will
   automatically deactivate the transmitter within not more than 5 seconds of
   being released.

   (2) A transmitter activated automatically shall cease transmission within 5
   seconds after activation.

   (3)  Periodic transmissions at regular predetermined intervals are not
   permitted. However, polling or supervision transmissions, including data, to
   determine  system integrity of transmitters used in security or safety
   applications are allowed if the total duration of transmissions does not
   exceed more than two seconds per hour for each transmitter. There is no
   limit  on  the  number of individual transmissions, provided the total
   transmission time does not exceed two seconds per hour.

   (4) Intentional radiators which are employed for radio control purposes
   during  emergencies involving fire, security, and safety of life, when
   activated to signal an alarm, may operate during the pendency of the alarm
   condition

   (5) Transmission of set-up information for security systems may exceed the
   transmission  duration  limits in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this
   section, provided such transmissions are under the control of a professional
   installer and do not exceed ten seconds after a manually operated switch is
   released  or  a  transmitter  is  activated automatically. Such set-up
   information may include data.

   (b)  In  addition  to the provisions of §15.205, the field strength of
   emissions from intentional radiators operated under this section shall not
   exceed the following:
   Fundamental frequency (MHz) Field strength of fundamental (microvolts/meter)
   Field strength of spurious emissions (microvolts/meter)
   40.66–40.70 2,250 225
   70–130 1,250 125
   130–174 ^11,250 to 3,750 ^1125 to 375
   174–260 3,750 375
   260–470 ^13,750 to 12,500 ^1375 to 1,250
   Above 470 12,500 1,250

   ^1Linear interpolations.

   (1) The above field strength limits are specified at a distance of 3 meters.
   The tighter limits apply at the band edges.

   (2) Intentional radiators operating under the provisions of this section
   shall  demonstrate compliance with the limits on the field strength of
   emissions, as shown in the above table, based on the average value of the
   measured emissions. As an alternative, compliance with the limits in the
   above table may be based on the use of measurement instrumentation with a
   CISPR quasi-peak detector. The specific method of measurement employed shall
   be specified in the application for equipment authorization. If average
   emission measurements are employed, the provisions in §15.35 for averaging
   pulsed emissions and for limiting peak emissions apply. Further, compliance
   with the provisions of §15.205 shall be demonstrated using the measurement
   instrumentation specified in that section.

   (3) The limits on the field strength of the spurious emissions in the above
   table are based on the fundamental frequency of the intentional radiator.
   Spurious emissions shall be attenuated to the average (or, alternatively,
   CISPR quasi-peak) limits shown in this table or to the general limits shown
   in §15.209, whichever limit permits a higher field strength.

   (c) The bandwidth of the emission shall be no wider than 0.25% of the center
   frequency for devices operating above 70 MHz and below 900 MHz. For devices
   operating above 900 MHz, the emission shall be no wider than 0.5% of the
   center frequency. Bandwidth is determined at the points 20 dB down from the
   modulated carrier.

   (d) For devices operating within the frequency band 40.6640.70 MHz, the
   bandwidth of the emission shall be confined within the band edges and the
   frequency tolerance of the carrier shall be ±0.01%. This frequency tolerance
   shall  be maintained for a temperature variation of −20 degrees to +50
   degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in the primary
   supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a temperature
   of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment tests shall
   be performed using a new battery.

   (e) Intentional radiators may operate at a periodic rate exceeding that
   specified in paragraph (a) of this section and may be employed for any type
   of  operation, including operation prohibited in paragraph (a) of this
   section, provided the intentional radiator complies with the provisions of
   paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, except the field strength table
   in paragraph (b) of this section is replaced by the following:
   Fundamental frequency (MHz) Field strength of fundamental (microvolts/meter)
   Field strength of spurious emission (microvolts/meter)
   40.66–40.70 1,000 100
   70–130 500 50
   130–174 500 to 1,500^1 50 to 150^1
   174–260 1,500 150
   260–470 1,500 to 5,000^1 150 to 500^1
   Above 470 5,000 500

   ^1Linear interpolations.

   In addition, devices operated under the provisions of this paragraph shall
   be provided with a means for automatically limiting operation so that the
   duration of each transmission shall not be greater than one second and the
   silent period between transmissions shall be at least 30 times the duration
   of the transmission but in no case less than 10 seconds.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989, as amended at  68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003;  69 FR 71383 , Dec. 9, 2004]

§ 15.233   Operation within the bands 43.7144.49 MHz, 46.60–46.98 MHz,
48.75–49.51 MHz and 49.6650.0 MHz.

   top

   (a)  The  provisions  shown in this section are restricted to cordless
   telephones.

   (b) An intentional radiator used as part of a cordless telephone system
   shall operate centered on one or more of the following frequency pairs,
   subject to the following conditions:

   (1) Frequencies shall be paired as shown below, except that channel pairing
   for channels one through fifteen may be accomplished by pairing any of the
   fifteen  base  transmitter frequencies with any of the fifteen handset
   transmitter frequencies.

   (2) Cordless telephones operating on channels one through fifteen must:

   (i) Incorporate an automatic channel selection mechanism that will prevent
   establishment of a link on any occupied frequency; and

   (ii) The box or an instruction manual which is included within the box which
   the  individual  cordless  telephone  is  to be marketed shall contain
   information indicating that some cordless telephones operate at frequencies
   that may cause interference to nearby TVs and VCRs; to minimize or prevent
   such interference, the base of the cordless telephone should not be placed
   near or on top of a TV or VCR; and, if interference is experienced, moving
   the cordless telephone farther away from the TV or VCR will often reduce or
   eliminate the interference. A statement describing the means and procedures
   used  to  achieve automatic channel selection shall be provided in any
   application for equipment authorization of a cordless telephone operating on
   channels one through fifteen.
   Channel Base transmitter (MHz) Handset transmitter (MHz)
   1                       43.720                    48.760
   2                       43.740                    48.840
   3                       43.820                    48.860
   4                       43.840                    48.920
   5                       43.920                    49.020
   6                       43.960                    49.080
   7                       44.120                    49.100
   8                       44.160                    49.160
   9                       44.180                    49.200
   10                      44.200                    49.240
   11                      44.320                    49.280
   12                      44.360                    49.360
   13                      44.400                    49.400
   14                      44.460                    49.460
   15                      44.480                    49.500
   16                      46.610                    49.670
   17                      46.630                    49.845
   18                      46.670                    49.860
   19                      46.710                    49.770
   20                      46.730                    49.875
   21                      46.770                    49.830
   22                      46.830                    49.890
   23                      46.870                    49.930
   24                      46.930                    49.990
   25                      46.970                    49.970

   (c) The field strength of the fundamental emission shall not exceed 10,000
   microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is based
   on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The provisions
   in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

   (d) The fundamental emission shall be confined within a 20 kHz band and
   shall be centered on a carrier frequency shown above, as adjusted by the
   frequency tolerance of the transmitter at the time testing is performed.
   Modulation products outside of this 20 kHz band shall be attenuated at least
   26 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier or to the general limits in
   §15.209, whichever permits the higher emission levels. Emissions on any
   frequency more than 20 kHz removed from the center frequency shall consist
   solely of unwanted emissions and shall not exceed the general radiated
   emission  limits  in §15.209. Tests to determine compliance with these
   requirements  shall  be performed using an appropriate input signal as
   prescribed in §2.989 of this chapter.

   (e)  All emissions exceeding 20 microvolts/meter at 3 meters are to be
   reported in the application for certification.

   (f) If the device provides for the connection of external accessories,
   including external electrical input signals, the device must be tested with
   the accessories attached. The emission tests shall be performed with the
   device and accessories configured in a manner which tends to produce the
   maximum  level of emissions within the range of variations that can be
   expected under normal operating conditions.

   (g) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
   ±0.01% of the operating frequency. The tolerance shall be maintained for a
   temperature variation of −20 degrees C to +50 degrees C at normal supply
   voltage, and for variation in the primary voltage from 85% to 115% of the
   rated supply voltage at a temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated
   equipment, the equipment tests shall be performed using a new battery.

   (h) For cordless telephones that do not comply with §15.214(d) of this part,
   the box or other package in which the individual cordless telephone is to be
   marketed shall carry a statement in a prominent location, visible to the
   buyer before purchase, which reads as follows:

   Notice:The base units of some cordless telephones may respond to other
   nearby units or to radio noise resulting in telephone calls being dialed
   through this unit without your knowledge and possibly calls being misbilled.
   In order to protect against such occurrences, this cordless telephone is
   provided with the following features: (to be completed by the responsible
   party).

   An application for certification of a cordless telephone shall specify the
   complete text of the statement that will be carried on the package and
   indicate where, specifically, it will be located on the carton.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989, as amended at  56 FR 3785 , Jan. 31, 1991;  56 FR 5659 , Feb. 12, 1991;  60 FR 21985 , May 4, 1995]

§ 15.235   Operation within the band 49.8249.90 MHz.

   top

   (a) The field strength of any emission within this band shall not exceed
   10,000 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is
   based on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The
   provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

   (b) The field strength of any emissions appearing between the band edges and
   up to 10 kHz above and below the band edges shall be attenuated at least 26
   dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier or to the general limits in
   §15.209, whichever permits the higher emission levels. The field strength of
   any emissions removed by more than 10 kHz from the band edges shall not
   exceed  the  general  radiated emission limits in §15.209. All signals
   exceeding  20  microvolts/meter  at  3 meters shall be reported in the
   application for certification.

   (c)  For  a  home-built intentional radiator, as defined in §15.23(a),
   operating within the band 49.8249.90 MHz, the following standards may be
   employed:

   (1) The RF carrier and modulation products shall be maintained within the
   band 49.8249.90 MHz.

   (2) The total input power to the device measured at the battery or the power
   line  terminals shall not exceed 100 milliwatts under any condition of
   modulation.

   (3) The antenna shall be a single element, one meter or less in length,
   permanently mounted on the enclosure containing the device.

   (4) Emissions outside of this band shall be attenuated at least 20 dB below
   the level of the unmodulated carrier.

   (5) The regulations contained in §15.23 of this part apply to intentional
   radiators constructed under the provisions of this paragraph.

   (d) Cordless telephones are not permitted to operate under the provisions of
   this section.

§ 15.237   Operation in the bands 72.073.0 MHz, 74.6–74.8 MHz and 75.276.0
MHz.

   top

   (a) The intentional radiator shall be restricted to use as an auditory
   assistance device.

   (b) Emissions from the intentional radiator shall be confined within a band
   200 kHz wide centered on the operating frequency. The 200 kHz band shall lie
   wholly within the above specified frequency ranges.

   (c) The field strength of any emissions within the permitted 200 kHz band
   shall not exceed 80 millivolts/meter at 3 meters. The field strength of any
   emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the specified 200 kHz band
   shall not exceed 1500 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limits in
   this paragraph are based on measurement instrumentation employing an average
   detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  57 FR 13048 , Apr. 15, 1992]

§ 15.239   Operation in the band 88–108 MHz.

   top

   (a) Emissions from the intentional radiator shall be confined within a band
   200 kHz wide centered on the operating frequency. The 200 kHz band shall lie
   wholly within the frequency range of 88–108 MHz.

   (b) The field strength of any emissions within the permitted 200 kHz band
   shall not exceed 250 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in
   this paragraph is based on measurement instrumentation employing an average
   detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

   (c) The field strength of any emissions radiated on any frequency outside of
   the specified 200 kHz band shall not exceed the general radiated emission
   limits in §15.209.

   (d) A custom built telemetry intentional radiator operating in the frequency
   band 88–108 MHz and used for experimentation by an educational institute
   need not be certified provided the device complies with the standards in
   this part and the educational institution notifies the Engineer in Charge of
   the local FCC office, in writing, in advance of operation, providing the
   following information:

   (1) The dates and places where the device will be operated;

   (2) The purpose for which the device will be used;

   (3) A description of the device, including the operating frequency, RF power
   output, and antenna; and,

   (4) A statement that the device complies with the technical provisions of
   this part.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989]

§ 15.240   Operation in the band 433.5434.5 MHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this section is restricted to devices
   that use radio frequency energy to identify the contents of commercial
   shipping containers. Operations must be limited to commercial and industrial
   areas such as ports, rail terminals and warehouses. Two-way operation is
   permitted to interrogate and to load data into devices. Devices operated
   pursuant to the provisions of this section shall not be used for voice
   communications.

   (b)  The field strength of any emissions radiated within the specified
   frequency band shall not exceed 11,000 microvolts per meter measured at a
   distance of 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is based on
   measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The peak level of
   any emissions within the specified frequency band shall not exceed 55,000
   microvolts per meter measured at a distance of 3 meters. Additionally,
   devices authorized under these provisions shall be provided with a means for
   automatically limiting operation so that the duration of each transmission
   shall not be greater than 60 seconds and be only permitted to reinitiate an
   interrogation  in  the  case  of  a  transmission error. Absent such a
   transmission error, the silent period between transmissions shall not be
   less than 10 seconds.

   (c) The field strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the
   specified band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits in
   §15.209.

   (d) In the case of radio frequency powered tags designed to operate with a
   device authorized under this section, the tag may be approved with the
   device  or  be  considered  as  a  separate  device subject to its own
   authorization.  Powered  tags  approved  with  a device under a single
   application shall be labeled with the same identification number as the
   device.

   (e) To prevent interference to Federal Government radar systems, operation
   under the provisions of this section is not permitted within 40 kilometers
   of the following locations:
         DoD Radar Site        Latitude    Longitude
   Beale Air Force Base       39°08'10" N 121°21'04" W
   Cape Cod Air Force Station 41°45'07" N 070°32'17" W
   Clear Air Force Station    64°55'16" N 143°05'02" W
   Cavalier Air Force Station 48°43'12" N 097°54'00" W
   Eglin Air Force Base       30°43'12" N 086°12'36" W

   (f) As a condition of the grant, the grantee of an equipment authorization
   for a device operating under the provisions of this section shall provide
   information  to  the  user  concerning compliance with the operational
   restrictions  in  paragraphs (a) and (e) of this section. As a further
   condition, the grantee shall provide information on the locations where the
   devices are installed to the FCC Office of Engineering and Technology, which
   shall  provide  this information to the Federal Government through the
   National Telecommunications and Information Administration. The user of the
   device shall be responsible for submitting updated information in the event
   the  operating location or other information changes after the initial
   registration. The grantee shall notify the user of this requirement. The
   information provided by the grantee or user to the Commission shall include
   the name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the user, the
   address and geographic coordinates of the operating location, and the FCC
   identification number of the device. The material shall be submitted to the
   following address:

   Experimental Licensing Branch, OET, Federal Communications Commission, 445
   12th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20554, ATTN: RFID Registration.

   [ 69 FR 29464 , May 24, 2004]

§ 15.241   Operation in the band 174–216 MHz.

   top

   (a)  Operation  under  the provisions of this section is restricted to
   biomedical telemetry devices.

   (b) Emissions from the device shall be confined within a 200 kHz band which
   shall lie wholly within the frequency range of 174–216 MHz.

   (c) The field strength of any emissions radiated within the specified 200
   kHz band shall not exceed 1500 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The field
   strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the specified 200
   kHz band shall not exceed 150 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission
   limits in this paragraph are based on measurement instrumentation employing
   an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions
   apply.

§ 15.242   Operation in the bands 174–216 MHz and 470–668 MHz.

   top

   (a)  The  marketing  and  operation of intentional radiators under the
   provisions of this section is restricted to biomedical telemetry devices
   employed solely on the premises of health care facilities.

   (1) A health care facility includes hospitals and other establishments that
   offer services, facilities, and beds for use beyond 24 hours in rendering
   medical treatment and institutions and organizations regularly engaged in
   providing medical services through clinics, public health facilities, and
   similar establishments, including governmental entities and agencies for
   their own medical activities.

   (2) This authority to operate does not extend to mobile vehicles, such as
   ambulances,  even  if those vehicles are associated with a health care
   facility.

   (b) The fundamental emissions from a biomedical telemetry device operating
   under the provisions of this section shall be contained within a single
   television broadcast channel, as defined in part 73 of this chapter, under
   all conditions of operation and shall lie wholly within the frequency ranges
   of 174–216 MHz and 470–668 MHz.

   (c) The field strength of the fundamental emissions shall not exceed 200
   mV/m, as measured at a distance of 3 meters using a quasi-peak detector.
   Manufacturers should note that a quasi-peak detector function indicates
   field strength per 120 kHz of bandwidth ±20 kHz. Accordingly, the total
   signal level over the band of operation may be higher than 200 mV/m. The
   field  strength  of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the
   television broadcast channel within which the fundamental is contained shall
   not exceed the general limits in §15.209.

   (d) The user and the installer of a biomedical telemetry device operating
   within the frequency range 174–216 MHz, 470–608 MHz or 614–668 MHz shall
   ensure  that the following minimum separation distances are maintained
   between the biomedical telemetry device and the authorized radio services
   operating on the same frequencies:

   (1) At least 10.3 km outside of the Grade B field strength contour (56
   dBuV/m)  of a TV broadcast station or an associated TV booster station
   operating within the band 174–216 MHz.

   (2)  At least 5.5 km outside of the Grade B field strength contour (64
   dBuV/m)  of a TV broadcast station or an associated TV booster station
   operating within the bands 470–608 MHz or 614–668 MHz.

   (3) At least 5.1 km outside of the 68 dBuV/m field strength contour of a low
   power TV or a TV translator station operating within the band 174–216 MHz.

   (4) At least 3.1 km outside of the 74 dBuV/m field strength contour of a low
   power TV or a TV translator station operating within the bands 470–608 MHz
   or 614–668 MHz.

   (5) Whatever distance is necessary to protect other authorized users within
   these bands.

   (e) The user and the installer of a biomedical telemetry device operating
   within the frequency range 608–614 MHz and that will be located within 32 km
   of the very long baseline array (VLBA) stations or within 80 km of any of
   the other radio astronomy observatories noted in footnote US 311 of Section
   2.106  of  this  chapter  must coordinate with, and obtain the written
   concurrence of, the director of the affected radio astronomy observatory
   before the equipment can be installed or operated. The National Science
   Foundation point of contact for coordination is: Spectrum Manager, Division
   of Astronomical Sciences, NSF Rm 1045, 4201 Wilson Blvd., Arlington, VA
   22230; tel: (703) 306–1823.

   (f) Biomedical telemetry devices must not cause harmful interference to
   licensed TV broadcast stations or to other authorized radio services, such
   as operations on the broadcast frequencies under subparts G and H of part 74
   of  this chapter, land mobile stations operating under part 90 of this
   chapter  in the 470–512 MHz band, and radio astronomy operation in the
   608–614  MHz  band.  (See  §15.5.) If harmful interference occurs, the
   interference must either be corrected or the device must immediately cease
   operation on the occupied frequency. Further, the operator of the biomedical
   telemetry device must accept whatever level of interference is received from
   other radio operations. The operator, i.e., the health care facility, is
   responsible for resolving any interference that occurs subsequent to the
   installation of these devices.

   (g) The manufacturers, installers, and users of biomedical telemetry devices
   are reminded that they must ensure that biomedical telemetry transmitters
   operating under the provisions of this section avoid operating in close
   proximity to authorized services using this spectrum. Sufficient separation
   distance, necessary to avoid causing or receiving harmful interference, must
   be maintained from co-channel operations. These parties are reminded that
   the frequencies of the authorized services are subject to change, especially
   during the implementation of the digital television services. The operating
   frequencies of the part 15 devices may need to be changed, as necessary and
   in accordance with the permissive change requirements of this chapter, to
   accommodate changes in the operating frequencies of the authorized services.

   (h) The manufacturers, installers and users of biomedical telemetry devices
   are cautioned that the operation of this equipment could result in harmful
   interference to other nearby medical devices.

   [ 62 FR 58658 , Oct. 30, 1997]

§ 15.243   Operation in the band 890–940 MHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this section is restricted to devices
   that  use  radio  frequency energy to measure the characteristics of a
   material. Devices operated pursuant to the provisions of this section shall
   not be used for voice communications or the transmission of any other type
   of message.

   (b)  The field strength of any emissions radiated within the specified
   frequency band shall not exceed 500 microvolts/meter at 30 meters. The
   emission limit in this paragraph is based on measurement instrumentation
   employing an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak
   emissions apply.

   (c) The field strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the
   specified band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits in
   §15.209.

   (d)  The  device  shall  be self-contained with no external or readily
   accessible controls which may be adjusted to permit operation in a manner
   inconsistent with the provisions in this section. Any antenna that may be
   used with the device shall be permanently attached thereto and shall not be
   readily modifiable by the user.

§ 15.245   Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2435–2465 MHz, 5785–5815
MHz, 10500–10550 MHz, and 24075–24175 MHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to intentional
   radiators used as field disturbance sensors, excluding perimeter protection
   systems.

   (b) The field strength of emissions from intentional radiators operated
   within these frequency bands shall comply with the following:
   Fundamental frequency (MHz) Field strength of fundamental (millivolts/meter)
   Field strength of harmonics (millivolts/meter)
   902–928 500 1.6
   2435–2465 500 1.6
   5785–5815 500 1.6
   10500–10550 2500 25.0
   24075–24175 2500 25.0

   (1) Regardless of the limits shown in the above table, harmonic emissions in
   the restricted bands below 17.7 GHz, as specified in §15.205, shall not
   exceed the field strength limits shown in §15.209. Harmonic emissions in the
   restricted bands at and above 17.7 GHz shall not exceed the following field
   strength limits:

   (i)  For  the  second and third harmonics of field disturbance sensors
   operating  in the 24075–24175 MHz band and for other field disturbance
   sensors designed for use only within a building or to open building doors,
   25.0 mV/m.

   (ii) For all other field disturbance sensors, 7.5 mV/m.

   (iii) Field disturbance sensors designed to be used in motor vehicles or
   aircraft must include features to prevent continuous operation unless their
   emissions in the restricted bands, other than the second and third harmonics
   from devices operating in the 24075–24175 MHz band, fully comply with the
   limits given in §15.209. Continuous operation of field disturbance sensors
   designed to be used in farm equipment, vehicles such as fork lifts that are
   intended primarily for use indoors or for very specialized operations, or
   railroad locomotives, railroad cars and other equipment which travels on
   fixed tracks is permitted. A field disturbance sensor will be considered not
   to be operating in a continuous mode if its operation is limited to specific
   activities of limited duration (e.g., putting a vehicle into reverse gear,
   activating a turn signal, etc.).

   (2) Field strength limits are specified at a distance of 3 meters.

   (3) Emissions radiated outside of the specified frequency bands, except for
   harmonics, shall be attenuated by at least 50 dB below the level of the
   fundamental or to the general radiated emission limits in §15.209, whichever
   is the lesser attenuation.

   (4) The emission limits shown above are based on measurement instrumentation
   employing an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak
   emissions apply.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 46792 , Nov. 7, 1990;  61 FR 42558 , Aug. 16, 1996;  68 FR 68547 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.247   Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and
5725–5850 MHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this Section is limited to frequency
   hopping and digitally modulated intentional radiators that comply with the
   following provisions:

   (1) Frequency hopping systems shall have hopping channel carrier frequencies
   separated by a minimum of 25 kHz or the 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping
   channel, whichever is greater. Alternatively, frequency hopping systems
   operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band may have hopping channel carrier
   frequencies  that  are  separated by 25 kHz or two-thirds of the 20 dB
   bandwidth of the hopping channel, whichever is greater, provided the systems
   operate with an output power no greater than 125 mW. The system shall hop to
   channel frequencies that are selected at the system hopping rate from a
   pseudo randomly ordered list of hopping frequencies. Each frequency must be
   used equally on the average by each transmitter. The system receivers shall
   have input bandwidths that match the hopping channel bandwidths of their
   corresponding transmitters and shall shift frequencies in synchronization
   with the transmitted signals.

   (i) For frequency hopping systems operating in the 902–928 MHz band: if the
   20 dB bandwidth of the hopping channel is less than 250 kHz, the system
   shall use at least 50 hopping frequencies and the average time of occupancy
   on any frequency shall not be greater than 0.4 seconds within a 20 second
   period; if the 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping channel is 250 kHz or greater,
   the system shall use at least 25 hopping frequencies and the average time of
   occupancy on any frequency shall not be greater than 0.4 seconds within a 10
   second period. The maximum allowed 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping channel is
   500 kHz.

   (ii) Frequency hopping systems operating in the 5725–5850 MHz band shall use
   at least 75 hopping frequencies. The maximum 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping
   channel is 1 MHz. The average time of occupancy on any frequency shall not
   be greater than 0.4 seconds within a 30 second period.

   (iii) Frequency hopping systems in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band shall use at
   least 15 channels. The average time of occupancy on any channel shall not be
   greater than 0.4 seconds within a period of 0.4 seconds multiplied by the
   number of hopping channels employed. Frequency hopping systems may avoid or
   suppress transmissions on a particular hopping frequency provided that a
   minimum of 15 channels are used.

   (2) Systems using digital modulation techniques may operate in the 902–928
   MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and 5725–5850 MHz bands. The minimum 6 dB bandwidth
   shall be at least 500 kHz.

   (b) The maximum peak conducted output power of the intentional radiator
   shall not exceed the following:

   (1) For frequency hopping systems operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band
   employing at least 75 non-overlapping hopping channels, and all frequency
   hopping systems in the 5725–5850 MHz band: 1 watt. For all other frequency
   hopping systems in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band: 0.125 watts.

   (2) For frequency hopping systems operating in the 902–928 MHz band: 1 watt
   for systems employing at least 50 hopping channels; and, 0.25 watts for
   systems employing less than 50 hopping channels, but at least 25 hopping
   channels, as permitted under paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section.

   (3) For systems using digital modulation in the 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5
   MHz, and 5725–5850 MHz bands: 1 Watt. As an alternative to a peak power
   measurement,  compliance  with  the  one  Watt limit can be based on a
   measurement of the maximum conducted output power. Maximum Conducted Output
   Power is defined as the total transmit power delivered to all antennas and
   antenna elements averaged across all symbols in the signaling alphabet when
   the transmitter is operating at its maximum power control level. Power must
   be summed across all antennas and antenna elements. The average must not
   include  any  time intervals during which the transmitter is off or is
   transmitting at a reduced power level. If multiple modes of operation are
   possible (e.g., alternative modulation methods), the maximum conducted
   output power is the highest total transmit power occurring in any mode.

   (4) The conducted output power limit specified in paragraph (b) of this
   section is based on the use of antennas with directional gains that do not
   exceed  6  dBi.  Except  as shown in paragraph (c) of this section, if
   transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, the
   conducted output power from the intentional radiator shall be reduced below
   the stated values in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), and (b)(3) of this section,
   as appropriate, by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna
   exceeds 6 dBi.

   (i) Systems operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band that are used exclusively
   for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
   directional gain greater than 6 dBi provided the maximum peak output power
   of the intentional radiator is reduced by 1 dB for every 3 dB that the
   directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi.

   (ii) Systems operating in the 5725–5850 MHz band that are used exclusively
   for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
   directional gain greater than 6 dBi without any corresponding reduction in
   transmitter peak output power.

   (iii) Fixed, point-to-point operation, as used in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and
   (b)(3)(ii) of this section, excludes the use of point-to-multipoint systems,
   omnidirectional applications, and multiple co-located intentional radiators
   transmitting the same information. The operator of the spread spectrum
   intentional radiator or, if the equipment is professionally installed, the
   installer is responsible for ensuring that the system is used exclusively
   for fixed, point-to-point operations. The instruction manual furnished with
   the  intentional  radiator  shall contain language in the installation
   instructions   informing  the  operator  and  the  installer  of  this
   responsibility.

   (c) Operation with directional antenna gains greater than 6 dBi.

   (1) Fixed point-to-point operation:

   (i) Systems operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band that are used exclusively
   for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
   directional gain greater than 6 dBi provided the maximum conducted output
   power of the intentional radiator is reduced by 1 dB for every 3 dB that the
   directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi.

   (ii) Systems operating in the 5725–5850 MHz band that are used exclusively
   for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
   directional gain greater than 6 dBi without any corresponding reduction in
   transmitter conducted output power.

   (iii) Fixed, point-to-point operation, as used in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and
   (c)(1)(ii) of this section, excludes the use of point-to-multipoint systems,
   omnidirectional applications, and multiple co-located intentional radiators
   transmitting the same information. The operator of the spread spectrum or
   digitally  modulated  intentional  radiator  or,  if  the equipment is
   professionally installed, the installer is responsible for ensuring that the
   system  is  used exclusively for fixed, point-to-point operations. The
   instruction manual furnished with the intentional radiator shall contain
   language in the installation instructions informing the operator and the
   installer of this responsibility.

   (2) In addition to the provisions in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3), (b)(4) and
   (c)(1)(i) of this section, transmitters operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz
   band that emit multiple directional beams, simultaneously or sequentially,
   for the purpose of directing signals to individual receivers or to groups of
   receivers provided the emissions comply with the following:

   (i) Different information must be transmitted to each receiver.

   (ii)  If the transmitter employs an antenna system that emits multiple
   directional  beams  but  does  not  do emit multiple directional beams
   simultaneously, the total output power conducted to the array or arrays that
   comprise the device, i.e., the sum of the power supplied to all antennas,
   antenna elements, staves, etc. and summed across all carriers or frequency
   channels, shall not exceed the limit specified in paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(3)
   of this section, as applicable. However, the total conducted output power
   shall be reduced by 1 dB below the specified limits for each 3 dB that the
   directional gain of the antenna/antenna array exceeds 6 dBi. The directional
   antenna gain shall be computed as follows:

   (A) The directional gain shall be calculated as the sum of 10 log (number of
   array elements or staves) plus the directional gain of the element or stave
   having the highest gain.

   (B) A lower value for the directional gain than that calculated in paragraph
   (c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section will be accepted if sufficient evidence is
   presented,  e.g., due to shading of the array or coherence loss in the
   beamforming.

   (iii) If a transmitter employs an antenna that operates simultaneously on
   multiple directional beams using the same or different frequency channels,
   the power supplied to each emission beam is subject to the power limit
   specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section. If transmitted beams
   overlap, the power shall be reduced to ensure that their aggregate power
   does not exceed the limit specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section.
   In addition, the aggregate power transmitted simultaneously on all beams
   shall not exceed the limit specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section
   by more than 8 dB.

   (iv) Transmitters that emit a single directional beam shall operate under
   the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section.

   (d) In any 100 kHz bandwidth outside the frequency band in which the spread
   spectrum or digitally modulated intentional radiator is operating, the radio
   frequency power that is produced by the intentional radiator shall be at
   least  20  dB below that in the 100 kHz bandwidth within the band that
   contains the highest level of the desired power, based on either an RF
   conducted or a radiated measurement, provided the transmitter demonstrates
   compliance with the peak conducted power limits. If the transmitter complies
   with the conducted power limits based on the use of RMS averaging over a
   time interval, as permitted under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, the
   attenuation required under this paragraph shall be 30 dB instead of 20 dB.
   Attenuation  below  the  general limits specified in §15.209(a) is not
   required. In addition, radiated emissions which fall in the restricted
   bands, as defined in §15.205(a), must also comply with the radiated emission
   limits specified in §15.209(a) (see §15.205(c)).

   (e) For digitally modulated systems, the power spectral density conducted
   from the intentional radiator to the antenna shall not be greater than 8 dBm
   in any 3 kHz band during any time interval of continuous transmission. This
   power spectral density shall be determined in accordance with the provisions
   of  paragraph  (b) of this section. The same method of determining the
   conducted  output  power shall be used to determine the power spectral
   density.

   (f) For the purposes of this section, hybrid systems are those that employ a
   combination of both frequency hopping and digital modulation techniques. The
   frequency hopping operation of the hybrid system, with the direct sequence
   or digital modulation operation turned off, shall have an average time of
   occupancy on any frequency not to exceed 0.4 seconds within a time period in
   seconds equal to the number of hopping frequencies employed multiplied by
   0.4.  The  digital modulation operation of the hybrid system, with the
   frequency hopping operation turned off, shall comply with the power density
   requirements of paragraph (d) of this section.

   (g) Frequency hopping spread spectrum systems are not required to employ all
   available hopping channels during each transmission. However, the system,
   consisting of both the transmitter and the receiver, must be designed to
   comply with all of the regulations in this section should the transmitter be
   presented with a continuous data (or information) stream. In addition, a
   system employing short transmission bursts must comply with the definition
   of a frequency hopping system and must distribute its transmissions over the
   minimum number of hopping channels specified in this section.

   (h) The incorporation of intelligence within a frequency hopping spread
   spectrum system that permits the system to recognize other users within the
   spectrum band so that it individually and independently chooses and adapts
   its  hopsets  to  avoid hopping on occupied channels is permitted. The
   coordination  of frequency hopping systems in any other manner for the
   express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping
   frequencies by multiple transmitters is not permitted.

   Note: Spread spectrum systems are sharing these bands on a noninterference
   basis with systems supporting critical Government requirements that have
   been allocated the usage of these bands, secondary only to ISM equipment
   operated under the provisions of part 18 of this chapter. Many of these
   Government systems are airborne radiolocation systems that emit a high EIRP
   which can cause interference to other users. Also, investigations of the
   effect of spread spectrum interference to U. S. Government operations in the
   902–928 MHz band may require a future decrease in the power limits allowed
   for spread spectrum operation.

   (i) Systems operating under the provisions of this section shall be operated
   in a manner that ensures that the public is not exposed to radio frequency
   energy levels in excess of the Commission's guidelines. See §1.1307(b)(1) of
   this chapter.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 28762 , July 13, 1990;  62 FR 26242 , May 13, 1997;  65 FR 57561 , Sept. 25, 2000;  67 FR 42734 , June 25,
   2002;  69 FR 54035 , Sept. 7, 2004;  72 FR 5632 , Feb. 7, 2007]

§ 15.249   Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, 5725–5875
MHZ, and 24.024.25 GHz.

   top

   (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the field strength
   of emissions from intentional radiators operated within these frequency
   bands shall comply with the following:
   Fundamental frequency Field strength of fundamental (millivolts/meter) Field
   strength of harmonics (microvolts/meter)
   902–928 MHz 50 500
   2400–2483.5 MHz 50 500
   5725–5875 MHz 50 500
   24.0–24.25 GHz 250 2500

   (b) Fixed, point-to-point operation as referred to in this paragraph shall
   be limited to systems employing a fixed transmitter transmitting to a fixed
   remote location. Point-to-multipoint systems, omnidirectional applications,
   and  multiple  co-located  intentional radiators transmitting the same
   information are not allowed. Fixed, point-to-point operation is permitted in
   the 24.05–24.25 GHz band subject to the following conditions:

   (1) The field strength of emissions in this band shall not exceed 2500
   millivolts/meter.

   (2) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
   ±0.001% of the operating frequency over a temperature variation of -20
   degrees to +50 degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in
   the primary supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a
   temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment
   tests shall be performed using a new battery.

   (3) Antenna gain must be at least 33 dBi. Alternatively, the main lobe
   beamwidth must not exceed 3.5 degrees. The beamwidth limit shall apply to
   both the azimuth and elevation planes. At antenna gains over 33 dBi or
   beamwidths narrower than 3.5 degrees, power must be reduced to ensure that
   the field strength does not exceed 2500 millivolts/meter.

   (c) Field strength limits are specified at a distance of 3 meters.

   (d) Emissions radiated outside of the specified frequency bands, except for
   harmonics, shall be attenuated by at least 50 dB below the level of the
   fundamental or to the general radiated emission limits in §15.209, whichever
   is the lesser attenuation.

   (e)  As  shown in §15.35(b), for frequencies above 1000 MHz, the field
   strength limits in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section are based on
   average limits. However, the peak field strength of any emission shall not
   exceed the maximum permitted average limits specified above by more than 20
   dB under any condition of modulation. For point-to-point operation under
   paragraph (b) of this section, the peak field strength shall not exceed 2500
   millivolts/meter at 3 meters along the antenna azimuth.

   (f) Parties considering the manufacture, importation, marketing or operation
   of  equipment  under  this section should also note the requirement in
   §15.37(d).

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at  55 FR 25095 , June 20, 1990;  67 FR 1625 , Jan. 14, 2002]

§ 15.250   Operation of wideband systems within the band 5925–7250 MHz.

   top

   (a) The −10 dB bandwidth of a device operating under the provisions of this
   section must be contained within the 5925–7250 MHz band under all conditions
   of operation including the effects from stepped frequency, frequency hopping
   or other modulation techniques that may be employed as well as the frequency
   stability of the transmitter over expected variations in temperature and
   supply voltage.

   (b) The −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission shall be at least 50
   MHz. For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency or
   similar  modulation types, measurement of the −10 dB minimum bandwidth
   specified in this paragraph shall be made with the frequency hop or step
   function disabled and with the transmitter operating continuously at a
   fundamental frequency following the provisions of §15.31(m).

   (c) Operation on board an aircraft or a satellite is prohibited. Devices
   operating under this section may not be employed for the operation of toys.
   Except for operation onboard a ship or a terrestrial transportation vehicle,
   the  use  of  a  fixed  outdoor  infrastructure is prohibited. A fixed
   infrastructure includes antennas mounted on outdoor structures, e.g. ,
   antennas mounted on the outside of a building or on a telephone pole.

   (d) Emissions from a transmitter operating under this section shall not
   exceed the following equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) density
   levels:

   (1) The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following RMS average limits
   based on measurements using a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −75.3
   1610–1990              −63.3
   1990–3100              −61.3
   3100–5925              −51.3
   5925–7250              −41.3
   7250–10600             −51.3
   Above 10600            −61.3

   (2) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (d)(1)  of  this  section, transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following RMS average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −85.3
   1559–1610              −85.3

   (3) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs and this 50 MHz bandwidth must be contained within the
   5925–7250 MHz band. The peak EIRP limit is 20 log (RBW/50) dBm where RBW is
   the resolution bandwidth in megahertz that is employed by the measurement
   instrument. RBW shall not be lower than 1 MHz or greater than 50 MHz. The
   video bandwidth of the measurement instrument shall not be less than RBW. If
   RBW is greater than 3 MHz, the application for certification filed with the
   Commission shall contain a detailed description of the test procedure,
   calibration of the test setup, and the instrumentation employed in the
   testing.

   (4) Radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
   levels in §15.209.

   (5) Emissions from digital circuitry used to enable the operation of the
   transmitter may comply with the limits in §15.209 provided it can be clearly
   demonstrated that those emissions are due solely to emissions from digital
   circuitry  contained  within the transmitter and the emissions are not
   intended to be radiated from the transmitter's antenna. Emissions from
   associated digital devices, as defined in §15.3(k), e.g. , emissions from
   digital circuitry used to control additional functions or capabilities other
   than the operation of the transmitter, are subject to the limits contained
   in subpart B of this part. Emissisons from these digital circuits shall not
   be employed in determining the −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission
   or the frequency at which the highest emission level occurs.

   (e) Measurement procedures:

   (1) All emissions at and below 960 MHz are based on measurements employing a
   CISPR quasi-peak detector. Unless otherwise specified, all RMS average
   emission levels specified in this section are to be measured utilizing a 1
   MHz  resolution bandwidth with a one millisecond dwell over each 1 MHz
   segment. The frequency span of the analyzer should equal the number of
   sampling bins times 1 MHz and the sweep rate of the analyzer should equal
   the  number  of  sampling bins times one millisecond. The provision in
   §15.35(c) that allows emissions to be averaged over a 100 millisecond period
   does not apply to devices operating under this section. The video bandwidth
   of  the  measurement  instrument shall not be less than the resolution
   bandwidth  and  trace averaging shall not be employed. The RMS average
   emission  measurement  is to be repeated over multiple sweeps with the
   analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

   (2) The peak emission measurement is to be repeated over multiple sweeps
   with the analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

   (3) For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency or
   similar  modulation  types,  the  peak emission level measurement, the
   measurement of the RMS average emission levels, and the measurement to
   determine the frequency at which the highest level emission occurs shall be
   made with the frequency hop or step function active. Gated signals may be
   measured with the gating active. The provisions of §15.31(c) continue to
   apply to transmitters that employ swept frequency modulation.

   (4) The −10 dB bandwidth is based on measurement using a peak detector, a 1
   MHz resolution bandwidth, and a video bandwidth greater than or equal to the
   resolution bandwidth.

   (5) Alternative measurement procedures may be considered by the Commission.

   [ 70 FR 6774 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.251   Operation within the bands 2.93.26 GHz, 3.267–3.332 GHz,
3.339–3.3458 GHz, and 3.3583.6 GHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to automatic
   vehicle identification systems (AVIS) which use swept frequency techniques
   for the purpose of automatically identifying transportation vehicles.

   (b) The field strength anywhere within the frequency range swept by the
   signal  shall  not exceed 3000 microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters in any
   direction. Further, an AVIS, when in its operating position, shall not
   produce a field strength greater than 400 microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters
   in any direction within ±10 degrees of the horizontal plane. In addition to
   the provisions of §15.205, the field strength of radiated emissions outside
   the frequency range swept by the signal shall be limited to a maximum of 100
   microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters, measured from 30 MHz to 20 GHz for the
   complete  system.  The  emission limits in this paragraph are based on
   measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The provisions in
   §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

   (c) The minimum sweep repetition rate of the signal shall not be lower than
   4000 sweeps per second, and the maximum sweep repetition rate of the signal
   shall not exceed 50,000 sweeps per second.

   (d) An AVIS shall employ a horn antenna or other comparable directional
   antenna for signal emission.

   (e) Provision shall be made so that signal emission from the AVIS shall
   occur only when the vehicle to be identified is within the radiated field of
   the system.

   (f)  In addition to the labelling requirements in §15.19(a), the label
   attached to the AVIS transmitter shall contain a third statement regarding
   operational conditions, as follows:

    *  *  * and, (3) during use this device (the antenna) may not be pointed
   within ±** degrees of the horizontal plane.

   The  double asterisks in condition three (**) shall be replaced by the
   responsible party with the angular pointing restriction necessary to meet
   the horizontal emission limit specified in paragraph (b).

   (g) In addition to the information required in subpart J of part 2, the
   application for certification shall contain:

   (1) Measurements of field strength per MHz along with the intermediate
   frequency of the spectrum analyzer or equivalent measuring receiver;

   (2) The angular separation between the direction at which maximum field
   strength occurs and the direction at which the field strength is reduced to
   400 microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters;

   (3) A photograph of the spectrum analyzer display showing the entire swept
   frequency signal and a calibrated scale for the vertical and horizontal
   axes; the spectrum analyzer settings that were used shall be labelled on the
   photograph; and,

   (4) The results of the frequency search for spurious and sideband emissions
   from 30 MHz to 20 GHz, exclusive of the swept frequency band, with the
   measuring instrument as close as possible to the unit under test.

   [ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989;  54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989]

§ 15.252   Operation of wideband vehicular radar systems within the bands
16.2–17.7 GHz and 23.1229.0 GHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under this section is limited to field disturbance sensors
   that are mounted in terrestrial transportation vehicles. Terrestrial use is
   limited to earth surface-based, non-aviation applications. Operation within
   the 16.2–17.7 GHz band is limited to field disturbance sensors that are used
   only  for back-up assistance and that operate only when the vehicle is
   engaged in reverse.

   (1) The −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission shall be located within
   the 16.2–17.7 GHz band or within the 23.12–29.0 GHz band, exclusive of the
   23.6–24.0 GHz restricted band, as appropriate, under all conditions of
   operation including the effects from stepped frequency, frequency hopping or
   other modulation techniques that may be employed as well as the frequency
   stability of the transmitter over expected variations in temperature and
   supply voltage.

   (2) The −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission shall be 10 MHz or
   greater. For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency
   or similar modulation types, measurement of the −10 dB minimum bandwidth
   specified in this paragraph shall be made with the frequency hop or step
   function disabled and with the transmitter operating continuously at a
   fundamental frequency following the provisions of §15.31(m).

   (3) For systems operating in the 23.12–29.0 GHz band, the frequencies at
   which the highest average emission level and at which the highest peak level
   emission appear shall be greater than 24.075 GHz.

   (4) These devices shall operate only when the vehicle is operating, e.g. ,
   the engine is running. Operation shall occur only upon specific activation,
   such  as upon starting the vehicle, changing gears, or engaging a turn
   signal.  The operation of these devices shall be related to the proper
   functioning of the transportation vehicle, e.g. , collision avoidance.

   (b) Emissions from a transmitter operating under this section shall not
   exceed the following equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) density
   levels:

   (1) For transmitters operating in the 16.2–17.7 GHz band, the RMS average
   radiated  emissions  above  960  MHz from a device operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following EIRP limits based
   on measurements using a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −75.3
   1610–16,200            −61.3
   16,200–17,700          −41.3
   Above 17,700           −61.3

   (2) For transmitters operating in the 23.12–29.0 GHz band, the RMS average
   radiated  emissions  above  960  MHz from a device operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following EIRP limits based
   on measurements using a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −75.3
   1610–23,120            −61.3
   23,120–23,600          −41.3
   23,600–24,000          −61.3
   24,000–29,000          −41.3
   Above 29,000           —61.3

   (3) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the tables in
   paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section, transmitters operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following RMS average
   EIRP limits when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1
   kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −85.3
   1559–1610              −85.3

   (4) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs and this 50 MHz bandwidth must be contained within the
   16.2–17.7 GHz band or the 24.05–29.0 GHz band, as appropriate. The peak EIRP
   limit is 20 log (RBW/50) dBm where RBW is the resolution bandwidth in MHz
   employed by the measurement instrument. RBW shall not be lower than 1 MHz or
   greater than 50 MHz. Further, RBW shall not be greater than the −10 dB
   bandwidth of the device under test. For transmitters that employ frequency
   hopping, stepped frequency or similar modulation types, measurement of the
   −10 dB minimum bandwidth specified in this paragraph shall be made with the
   frequency hop or step function disabled and with the transmitter operating
   continuously  at  a  fundamental frequency. The video bandwidth of the
   measurement  instrument  shall not be less than RBW. The limit on peak
   emissions applies to the 50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which
   the highest level radiated emission occurs. If RBW is greater than 3 MHz,
   the application for certification shall contain a detailed description of
   the test procedure, the instrumentation employed in the testing, and the
   calibration of the test setup.

   (5) Radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
   levels in §15.209.

   (6) Emissions from digital circuitry used to enable the operation of the
   transmitter may comply with the limits in §15.209 provided it can be clearly
   demonstrated that those emissions are due solely to emissions from digital
   circuitry  contained  within the transmitter and the emissions are not
   intended to be radiated from the transmitter's antenna. Emissions from
   associated digital devices, as defined in §15.3(k) , e.g. , emissions from
   digital circuitry used to control additional functions or capabilities other
   than the operation of the transmitter, are subject to the limits contained
   in subpart B of this part. Emissions from these digital circuits shall not
   be employed in determining the −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission
   or the frequency at which the highest emission level occurs.

   (c) Measurement procedures:

   (1) All emissions at and below 960 MHz are based on measurements employing a
   CISPR quasi-peak detector. Unless otherwise specified, all RMS average
   emission levels specified in this section are to be measured utilizing a 1
   MHz  resolution bandwidth with a one millisecond dwell over each 1 MHz
   segment. The frequency span of the analyzer should equal the number of
   sampling bins times 1 MHz and the sweep rate of the analyzer should equal
   the  number  of  sampling bins times one millisecond. The provision in
   §15.35(c) that allows emissions to be averaged over a 100 millisecond period
   does not apply to devices operating under this section. The video bandwidth
   of  the  measurement  instrument shall not be less than the resolution
   bandwidth  and  trace averaging shall not be employed. The RMS average
   emission  measurement  is to be repeated over multiple sweeps with the
   analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

   (2) The peak emission measurement is to be repeated over multiple sweeps
   with the analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

   (3) For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency or
   similar  modulation  types,  the  peak emission level measurement, the
   measurement of the RMS average emission levels, the measurement to determine
   the center frequency, and the measurement to determine the frequency at
   which the highest level emission occurs shall be made with the frequency hop
   or step function active. Gated signals may be measured with the gating
   active. The provisions of §15.31(c) continue to apply to transmitters that
   employ swept frequency modulation.

   (4) The −10 dB bandwidth is based on measurement using a peak detector, a 1
   MHz resolution bandwidth, and a video bandwidth greater than or equal to the
   resolution bandwidth.

   (5) Alternative measurement procedures may be considered by the Commission.

   [ 70 FR 6775 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.253   Operation within the bands 46.746.9 GHz and 76.077.0 GHz.

   top

   (a) Operation within the bands 46.746.9 GHz and 76.077.0 GHz is restricted
   to vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors used as vehicle radar systems.
   The transmission of additional information, such as data, is permitted
   provided  the  primary mode of operation is as a vehicle-mounted field
   disturbance sensor. Operation under the provisions of this section is not
   permitted on aircraft or satellites.

   (b)  The  radiated  emission limits within the bands 46.746.9 GHz and
   76.0–77.0 GHz are as follows:

   (1) If the vehicle is not in motion, the power density of any emission
   within the bands specified in this section shall not exceed 200 nW/cm^2 at a
   distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

   (2) For forward-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors, if the
   vehicle is in motion the power density of any emission within the bands
   specified in this section shall not exceed 60 μW/cm^2 at a distance of 3
   meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

   (3) For side-looking or rear-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance
   sensors, if the vehicle is in motion the power density of any emission
   within the bands specified in this section shall not exceed 30 μW/cm^2 at a
   distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

   (c) The power density of any emissions outside the operating band shall
   consist solely of spurious emissions and shall not exceed the following:

   (1) Radiated emissions below 40 GHz shall not exceed the general limits in
   §15.209.

   (2) Radiated emissions outside the operating band and between 40 GHz and 200
   GHz shall not exceed the following:

   (i) For vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors operating in the band
   46.7–46.9 GHz: 2 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface
   of the radiating structure.

   (ii) For forward-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors operating
   in  the band 76–77 GHz: 600 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters from the
   exterior surface of the radiating structure.

   (iii) For side-looking or rear-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance
   sensors operating in the band 76–77 GHz: 300 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3
   meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

   (3) For radiated emissions above 200 GHz from field disturbance sensors
   operating in the 76–77 GHz band: the power density of any emission shall not
   exceed 1000 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface of
   the radiating structure.

   (4) For field disturbance sensors operating in the 76–77 GHz band, the
   spectrum shall be investigated up to 231 GHz.

   (d) The provisions in §15.35 limiting peak emissions apply.

   (e) Fundamental emissions must be contained within the frequency bands
   specified in this section during all conditions of operation. Equipment is
   presumed to operate over the temperature range −20 to +50 degrees celsius
   with an input voltage variation of 85% to 115% of rated input voltage,
   unless justification is presented to demonstrate otherwise.

   (f) Regardless of the power density levels permitted under this section,
   devices operating under the provisions of this section are subject to the
   radiofrequency radiation exposure requirements specified in §§1.1307(b),
   2.1091  and  2.1093  of this chapter, as appropriate. Applications for
   equipment authorization of devices operating under this section must contain
   a  statement  confirming  compliance  with these requirements for both
   fundamental emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing
   the  basis for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon
   request.

   [ 61 FR 14503 , Apr. 2, 1996, as amended at  61 FR 41018 , Aug. 7, 1996;  63 FR 42279 , Aug. 7, 1998]

§ 15.255   Operation within the band 57–64 GHz.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this section is not permitted for the
   following products:

   (1) Equipment used on aircraft or satellites.

   (2) Field disturbance sensors, including vehicle radar systems, unless the
   field disturbance sensors are employed for fixed operation. For the purposes
   of this section, the reference to fixed operation includes field disturbance
   sensors installed in fixed equipment, even if the sensor itself moves within
   the equipment.

   (b)  Within  the  57–64 GHz band, emission levels shall not exceed the
   following:

   (1) For products other than fixed field disturbance sensors, the average
   power density of any emission, measured during the transmit interval, shall
   not exceed 9 μW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the radiating structure,
   and the peak power density of any emission shall not exceed 18 μW/cm^2 , as
   measured 3 meters from the radiating structure.

   (2) For fixed field disturbance sensors that occupy 500 MHz or less of
   bandwidth and that are contained wholly within the frequency band 61.061.5
   GHz, the average power density of any emission, measured during the transmit
   interval,  shall  not exceed 9 μW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the
   radiating structure, and the peak power density of any emission shall not
   exceed 18 μW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the radiating structure. In
   addition, the average power density of any emission outside of the 61–61.5
   GHz band, measured during the transmit interval, but still within the 57–64
   GHz  band,  shall not exceed 9 nW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the
   radiating structure, and the peak power density of any emission shall not
   exceed 18 nW/cm^2 , as measured three meters from the radiating structure.

   (3) For fixed field disturbance sensors other than those operating under the
   provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this section, the peak transmitter output
   power shall not exceed 0.1 mW and the peak power density shall not exceed 9
   nW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters.

   (4) Peak power density shall be measured with an RF detector that has a
   detection bandwidth that encompasses the 57–64 GHz band and has a video
   bandwidth of at least 10 MHz, or using an equivalent measurement method.

   (5) The average emission levels shall be calculated, based on the measured
   peak levels, over the actual time period during which transmission occurs.

   (c) Limits on spurious emissions:

   (1) The power density of any emissions outside the 57–64 GHz band shall
   consist solely of spurious emissions.

   (2) Radiated emissions below 40 GHz shall not exceed the general limits in
   §15.209.

   (3) Between 40 GHz and 200 GHz, the level of these emissions shall not
   exceed 90 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters.

   (4) The levels of the spurious emissions shall not exceed the level of the
   fundamental emission.

   (d)   Only   spurious   emissions   and  transmissions  related  to  a
   publicly-accessible coordination channel, whose purpose is to coordinate
   operation between diverse transmitters with a view towards reducing the
   probability of interference throughout the 57–64 GHz band, are permitted in
   the 57–57.05 GHz band.

   Note  to  paragraph(d): The 57–57.05 GHz is reserved exclusively for a
   publicly-accessible coordination channel. The development of standards for
   this channel shall be performed pursuant to authorizations issued under part
   5 of this chapter.

   (e) Except as specified elsewhere in this paragraph (e), the total peak
   transmitter output power shall not exceed 500 mW.

   (1) Transmitters with an emission bandwidth of less than 100 MHz must limit
   their peak transmitter output power to the product of 500 mW times their
   emission bandwidth divided by 100 MHz. For the purposes of this paragraph
   (e)(1), emission bandwidth is defined as the instantaneous frequency range
   occupied by a steady state radiated signal with modulation, outside which
   the radiated power spectral density never exceeds 6 dB below the maximum
   radiated power spectral density in the band, as measured with a 100 kHz
   resolution  bandwidth  spectrum analyzer. The center frequency must be
   stationary during the measurement interval, even if not stationary during
   normal operation (e.g. for frequency hopping devices).

   (2) Peak transmitter output power shall be measured with an RF detector that
   has a detection bandwidth that encompasses the 57–64 GHz band and that has a
   video bandwidth of at least 10 MHz, or using an equivalent measurement
   method.

   (3)  For purposes of demonstrating compliance with this paragraph (e),
   corrections to the transmitter output power may be made due to the antenna
   and circuit loss.

   (f) Fundamental emissions must be contained within the frequency bands
   specified in this section during all conditions of operation. Equipment is
   presumed to operate over the temperature range −20 to +50 degrees celsius
   with an input voltage variation of 85% to 115% of rated input voltage,
   unless justification is presented to demonstrate otherwise.

   (g) Regardless of the power density levels permitted under this section,
   devices operating under the provisions of this section are subject to the
   radiofrequency radiation exposure requirements specified in §§1.1307(b),
   2.1091  and  2.1093  of this chapter, as appropriate. Applications for
   equipment authorization of devices operating under this section must contain
   a  statement  confirming  compliance  with these requirements for both
   fundamental emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing
   the  basis for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon
   request.

   (h)  Any  transmitter  that  has  received the necessary FCC equipment
   authorization under the rules of this chapter may be mounted in a group
   installation  for  simultaneous  operation  with  one  or  more  other
   transmitter(s) that have received the necessary FCC equipment authorization,
   without any additional equipment authorization. However, no transmitter
   operating under the provisions of this section may be equipped with external
   phase-locking inputs that permit beam-forming arrays to be realized.

   (i) For all transmissions that emanate from inside of a building, within any
   one second interval of signal transmission, each transmitter with a peak
   output power equal to or greater than 0.1 mW or a peak power density equal
   to or greater than 3 nW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the radiating
   structure, must transmit a transmitter identification at least once. Each
   application for equipment authorization for equipment that will be used
   inside of a building must declare that the equipment contains the required
   transmitter  identification  feature and must specify a method whereby
   interested parties can obtain sufficient information, at no cost, to enable
   them to fully detect and decode this transmitter identification information.
   Upon the completion of decoding, the transmitter identification data block
   must provide the following fields:

   (1) FCC Identifier, which shall be programmed at the factory.

   (2) Manufacturer's serial number, which shall be programmed at the factory.

   (3) Provision for at least 24 bytes of data relevant to the specific device,
   which shall be field programmable. The grantee must implement a method that
   makes it possible for users to specify and update this data. The recommended
   content of this field is information to assist in contacting the operator.

   [ 63 FR 42279 , Aug. 7, 1998, as amended at  66 FR 7409 , Jan. 23, 2001;  68 FR 68547 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.257   Operation within the band 92–95 GHz.

   top

   (a) Operation of devices under the provisions of this section is limited to
   indoor use;

   (1) Devices operating under the provisions of this section, by the nature of
   their design, must be capable of operation only indoors. The necessity to
   operate with a fixed indoor infrastructure, e.g., a transmitter that must be
   connected to the AC power lines, may be considered sufficient to demonstrate
   this.

   (2) The use of outdoor mounted antennas, e.g., antennas mounted on the
   outside  of  a  building or on a telephone pole, or any other outdoors
   infrastructure is prohibited.

   (3) The emissions from equipment operated under this section shall not be
   intentionally directed outside of the building in which the equipment is
   located, such as through a window or a doorway.

   (4) Devices operating under the provisions of this section shall bear the
   following or similar statement in a conspicuous location on the device or in
   the instruction manual supplied with the device: “This equipment may only be
   operated indoors. Operation outdoors is in violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and
   could subject the operator to serious legal penalties.”

   (b) Operation under the provisions of this section is not permitted on
   aircraft or satellites.

   (c) Within the 92–95 GHz bands, the emission levels shall not exceed the
   following:

   (1) The average power density of any emission, measured during the transmit
   interval, shall not exceed 9 uW/sq. cm, as measured at 3 meters from the
   radiating structure, and the peak power density of any emission shall not
   exceed 18 uW/sq. cm, as measured 3 meters from the radiating structure.

   (2) Peak power density shall be measured with an RF detector that has a
   detection bandwidth that encompasses the band being used and has a video
   bandwidth of at least 10 MHz, or uses an equivalent measurement method.

   (3) The average emission limits shall be calculated based on the measured
   peak levels, over the actual time period during which transmission occurs.

   (d) Limits on spurious emissions:

   (1) The power density of any emissions outside the band being used shall
   consist solely of spurious emissions.

   (2) Radiated emissions below 40 GHz shall not exceed the general limits in
   §15.209.

   (3) Between 40 GHz and 200 GHz, the level of these emissions shall not
   exceed 90 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters.

   (4) The levels of the spurious emissions shall not exceed the level of the
   fundamental emission.

   (e) The total peak transmitter output power shall not exceed 500 mW.

   (f) Fundamental emissions must be contained within the frequency bands
   specified in this section during all conditions of operation. Equipment is
   presumed to operate over the temperature range −20 to +50 degrees Celsius
   with an input voltage variation of 85% to 115% of rated input voltage,
   unless justification is presented to demonstrate otherwise.

   (g)  Regardless  of  the maximum EIRP and maximum power density levels
   permitted under this section, devices operating under the provisions of this
   section are subject to the radiofrequency radiation exposure requirements
   specified  in  47  CFR  1.1307(b), 2.1091, and 2.1093, as appropriate.
   Applications for equipment authorization of devices operating under this
   section  must  contain  a  statement  confirming compliance with these
   requirements  for  both  fundamental emissions and unwanted emissions.
   Technical information showing the basis for this statement must be submitted
   to the Commission upon request.

   (h)  Any  transmitter  that  has  received the necessary FCC equipment
   authorization under the rules of this chapter may be mounted in a group
   installation  for  simultaneous  operation  with  one  or  more  other
   transmitter(s) that have received the necessary FCC equipment authorization,
   without any additional equipment authorization. However, no transmitter
   operating under the provisions of this section may be equipped with external
   phase-locking inputs that permit beam-forming arrays to be realized.

   [ 69 FR 3265 , Jan. 23, 2004]

Subpart D—Unlicensed Personal Communications Service Devices

   top

   Source:    58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, unless otherwise noted.

§ 15.301   Scope.

   top

   This subpart sets out the regulations for unlicensed personal communications
   services (PCS) devices operating in the 1920–1930 MHz band.

   [ 69 FR 77949 , Dec. 29, 2004]

§ 15.303   Definitions.

   top

   (a) Asynchronous devices. Devices that transmit RF energy at irregular time
   intervals, as typified by local area network data systems.

   (b)  Coordinatable  PCS device. PCS devices whose geographical area of
   operation is sufficiently controlled either by necessity of operation with a
   fixed  infrastructure  or  by  disabling  mechanisms to allow adequate
   coordination  of their locations relative to incumbent fixed microwave
   facilities.

   (c) Emission bandwidth. For purposes of this subpart the emission bandwidth
   shall be determined by measuring the width of the signal between two points,
   one below the carrier center frequency and one above the carrier center
   frequency,  that  are  26 dB down relative to the maximum level of the
   modulated carrier. Compliance with the emissions limits is based on the use
   of measurement instrumentation employing a peak detector function with an
   instrument resolutions bandwidth approximately equal to 1.0 percent of the
   emission bandwidth of the device under measurement.

   (d)  Isochronous devices. Devices that transmit at a regular interval,
   typified by time-division voice systems.

   (e) Noncoordinatable PCS device. A PCS device that is capable of randomly
   roaming and operating in geographic areas containing incumbent microwave
   facilities such that operation of the PCS device will potentially cause
   harmful interference to the incumbent microwave facilities.

   (f) Peak transmit power. The peak power output as measured over an interval
   of time equal to the frame rate or transmission burst of the device under
   all  conditions of modulation. Usually this parameter is measured as a
   conducted emission by direct connection of a calibrated test instrument to
   the  equipment under test. If the device cannot be connected directly,
   alternative techniques acceptable to the Commission may be used.

   (g) Personal Communications Services (PCS) Devices [Unlicensed]. Intentional
   radiators operating in the frequency band 1920–1930 MHz that provide a wide
   array of mobile and ancillary fixed communication services to individuals
   and businesses.

   (h) Spectrum window. An amount of spectrum equal to the intended emission
   bandwidth in which operation is desired.

   (i) Sub-band. For purposes of this subpart the term sub-band refers to the
   spectrum allocated for isochronous or asynchronous transmission.

   (j) Thermal noise power. The noise power in watts defined by the formula
   N=kTB where N is the noise power in watts, K is Boltzmann's constant, T is
   the absolute temperature in degrees Kelvin (e.g., 295 °K) and B is the
   emission bandwidth of the device in hertz.

   (k) Time window. An interval of time in which transmission is desired.

   [ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, as amended at  59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994;  60 FR 13073 , Mar. 10, 1995;  69 FR 62620 , Oct. 27, 2004;  69 FR 77949 , Dec. 29,
   2004]

§ 15.305   Equipment authorization requirement.

   top

   PCS  devices  operating  under  this subpart shall be certified by the
   Commission under the procedures in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter
   before marketing. The application for certification must contain sufficient
   information to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this subpart.

§ 15.307   Coordination with fixed microwave service.

   top

   (a) UTAM, Inc. is designated to coordinate and manage the transition of the
   1910–1930 MHz band from the Private Operational-Fixed Microwave Service
   (OFS) operating under part 101 of this chapter to unlicensed PCS operations,

   (b) Each application for certification of equipment operating under the
   provisions of this subpart must be accompanied by an affidavit from UTAM,
   Inc. certifying that the applicant is a participating member of UTAM, Inc.
   In  the  event a grantee fails to fulfill the obligations attendant to
   participation  in UTAM, Inc., the Commission may invoke administrative
   sanctions as necessary to preclude continued marketing and installation of
   devices covered by the grant of certification, including but not limited to
   revoking certification.

   (c) An application for certification of a PCS device that is deemed by UTAM,
   Inc.  to be noncoordinatable will not be accepted until the Commission
   announces that a need for coordination no longer exists.

   (d) A coordinatable PCS device is required to incorporate means that ensure
   that it cannot be activated until its location has been coordinated by UTAM,
   Inc. The application for certification shall contain an explanation of all
   measures taken to prevent unauthorized operation. This explanation shall
   include all procedural safeguards, such as the mandatory use of licensed
   technicians to install the equipment, and a complete description of all
   technical features controlling activation of the device.

   (e) A coordinatable PCS device shall incorporate an automatic mechanism for
   disabling operation in the event it is moved outside the geographic area
   where its operation has been coordinated by UTAM, Inc. The application for
   certification shall contain a full description of the safeguards against
   unauthorized relocation and must satisfy the Commission that the safeguards
   cannot be easily defeated.

   (f) At such time as the Commission deems that the need for coordination
   between  unlicensed  PCS  operations  and  existing  Part  101 Private
   Operational-Fixed  Microwave  Services  ceases to exist, the disabling
   mechanism  required by paragraph (e) of this section will no longer be
   required.

   (g) Operations under the provisions of this subpart are required to protect
   systems in the Private Operational-Fixed Microwave Service operating within
   the 1850–1990 MHz band until the dates and conditions specified in §§101.69
   through  101.73  of  this  chapter  for termination of primary status.
   Interference protection is not required for part 101 stations in this band
   licensed on a secondary basis.

   (h) The operator of a PCS device that is relocated from the coordinated area
   specified by UTAM, Inc., must cease operating the device until coordination
   for the new location is verified by UTAM, Inc.

   [ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, as amended at  59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994;  60 FR 27425 , May 24, 1995;  61 FR 29689 , June 12, 1996]

§ 15.309   Cross reference.

   top

   (a)  The  provisions of subpart A of this part apply to unlicensed PCS
   devices, except where specific provisions are contained in subpart D.

   (b)  The requirements of subpart D apply only to the radio transmitter
   contained in the PCS device. Other aspects of the operation of a PCS device
   may be subject to requirements contained elsewhere in this chapter. In
   particular,  a PCS device that includes digital circuitry not directly
   associated with the radio transmitter also is subject to the requirements
   for unintentional radiators in subpart B.

§ 15.311   Labeling requirements.

   top

   In  addition to the labeling requirements of §15.19(a)(3), all devices
   operating in the frequency band 1920–1930 MHz authorized under this subpart
   must bear a prominently located label with the following statement:

   Installation of this equipment is subject to notification and coordination
   with  UTAM,  Inc. Any relocation of this equipment must be coordinated
   through, and approved by UTAM. UTAM may be contacted at 1–800–429–8826.

   [ 69 FR 62620 , Oct. 27, 2004]

§ 15.313   Measurement procedures.

   top

   Measurements  must  be made in accordance with subpart A, except where
   specific procedures are specified in subpart D. If no guidance is provided,
   the  measurement procedure must be in accordance with good engineering
   practice.

§ 15.315   Conducted limits.

   top

   An unlicensed PCS device that is designed to be connected to the public
   utility (AC) power line must meet the limits specified in §15.207.

§ 15.317   Antenna requirement.

   top

   An unlicensed PCS device must meet the antenna requirement of §15.203.

§ 15.319   General technical requirements.

   top

   (a) [Reserved]

   (b) All transmissions must use only digital modulation techniques.

   (c) Peak transmit power shall not exceed 100 microwatts multiplied by the
   square root of the emission bandwidth in hertz. Peak transmit power must be
   measured over any interval of continuous transmission using instrumentation
   calibrated in terms of an rms-equivalent voltage. The measurement results
   shall be properly adjusted for any instrument limitations, such as detector
   response times, limited resolution bandwidth capability when compared to the
   emission  bandwidth,  sensitivity,  etc.,  so as to obtain a true peak
   measurement for the emission in question over the full bandwidth of the
   channel.

   (d)  Power spectral density shall not exceed 3 milliwatts in any 3 kHz
   bandwidth as measured with a spectrum analyzer having a resolution bandwidth
   of 3 kHz.

   (e) The peak transmit power shall be reduced by the amount in decibels that
   the maximum directional gain of the antenna exceeds 3 dBi.

   (f) The device shall automatically discontinue transmission in case of
   either  absence of information to transmit or operational failure. The
   provisions in this section are not intended to preclude transmission of
   control and signaling information or use of repetitive codes used by certain
   digital technologies to complete frame or burst intervals.

   (g) Notwithstanding other technical requirements specified in this subpart,
   attenuation of emissions below the general emission limits in §15.209 is not
   required.

   (h) Where there is a transition between limits, the tighter limit shall
   apply at the transition point.

   (i) Unlicensed PCS devices are subject to the radiofrequency radiation
   exposure requirements specified in §§1.1307(b), 2.1091 and 2.1093 of this
   chapter, as appropriate. All equipment shall be considered to operate in a
   “general population/uncontrolled” environment. Applications for equipment
   authorization  of  devices operating under this section must contain a
   statement confirming compliance with these requirements for both fundamental
   emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing the basis
   for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon request.

   [ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, as amended at  59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994;  59 FR 40835 , Aug. 10, 1994;  60 FR 13073 , Mar. 10, 1995;  61 FR 41018 , Aug. 7, 1996;
    69 FR 62621 , Oct. 27, 2004;  69 FR 77949 , Dec. 29, 2004]

§ 15.321   [Reserved]

   top

§ 15.323   Specific requirements for devices operating in the 1920–1930 MHz
sub-band.

   top

   (a) Operation shall be contained within the 1920–1930 MHz band. The emission
   bandwidth shall be less then 2.5 MHz. The power level shall be as specified
   in §15.319(c), but in no event shall the emission bandwidth be less than 50
   kHz.

   (b) [Reserved]

   (c)  Devices  must incorporate a mechanism for monitoring the time and
   spectrum windows that its transmission is intended to occupy. The following
   criteria must be met:

   (1) Immediately prior to initiating transmission, devices must monitor the
   combined time and spectrum windows in which they intend to transmit for a
   period  of  at  least 10 milliseconds for systems designed to use a 10
   milliseconds or shorter frame period or at least 20 milliseconds for systems
   designed to use a 20 milliseconds frame period.

   (2) The monitoring threshold must not be more than 30 dB above the thermal
   noise power for a bandwidth equivalent to the emission bandwidth used by the
   device.

   (3) If no signal above the threshold level is detected, transmission may
   commence and continue with the same emission bandwidth in the monitored time
   and spectrum windows without further monitoring. However, occupation of the
   same combined time and spectrum windows by a device or group of cooperating
   devices  continuously over a period of time longer than 8 hours is not
   permitted without repeating the access criteria.

   (4) Once access to specific combined time and spectrum windows is obtained
   an  acknowledgment  from  a system participant must be received by the
   initiating  transmitter  within one second or transmission must cease.
   Periodic acknowledgments must be received at least every 30 seconds or
   transmission must cease. Channels used exclusively for control and signaling
   information may transmit continuously for 30 seconds without receiving an
   acknowledgment, at which time the access criteria must be repeated.

   (5) If access to spectrum is not available as determined by the above, and a
   minimum of 40 duplex system access channels are defined for the system, the
   time and spectrum windows with the lowest power level below a monitoring
   threshold of 50 dB above the thermal noise power determined for the emission
   bandwidth  may  be accessed. A device utilizing the provisions of this
   paragraph must have monitored all access channels defined for its system
   within the last 10 seconds and must verify, within the 20 milliseconds (40
   milliseconds for devices designed to use a 20 milliseconds frame period)
   immediately preceding actual channel access that the detected power of the
   selected time and spectrum windows is no higher than the previously detected
   value. The power measurement resolution for this comparison must be accurate
   to within 6 dB. No device or group of co-operating devices located within 1
   meter of each other shall during any frame period occupy more than 6 MHz of
   aggregate bandwidth, or alternatively, more than one third of the time and
   spectrum windows defined by the system.

   (6) If the selected combined time and spectrum windows are unavailable, the
   device may either monitor and select different windows or seek to use the
   same windows after waiting an amount of time, randomly chosen from a uniform
   random distribution between 10 and 150 milliseconds, commencing when the
   channel becomes available.

   (7) The monitoring system bandwidth must be equal to or greater than the
   emission bandwidth of the intended transmission and have a maximum reaction
   time less than 50xSQRT (1.25/emission bandwidth in MHz) microseconds for
   signals at the applicable threshold level but shall not be required to be
   less than 50 microseconds. If a signal is detected that is 6 dB or more
   above the applicable threshold level, the maximum reaction time shall be
   35xSQRT (1.25/emission bandwidth in MHz) microseconds but shall not be
   required to be less than 35 microseconds.

   (8) The monitoring system shall use the same antenna used for transmission,
   or an antenna that yields equivalent reception at that location.

   (9) Devices that have a power output lower than the maximum permitted under
   this  subpart may increase their monitoring detection threshold by one
   decibel for each one decibel that the transmitter power is below the maximum
   permitted.

   (10) An initiating device may attempt to establish a duplex connection by
   monitoring both its intended transmit and receive time and spectrum windows.
   If both the intended transmit and receive time and spectrum windows meet the
   access criteria, then the initiating device can initiate a transmission in
   the intended transmit time and spectrum window. If the power detected by the
   responding device can be decoded as a duplex connection signal from the
   initiating  device,  then  the responding device may immediately begin
   transmitting  on the receive time and spectrum window monitored by the
   initiating device.

   (11) An initiating device that is prevented from monitoring during its
   intended  transmit  window  due to monitoring system blocking from the
   transmissions of a co-located (within one meter) transmitter of the same
   system, may monitor the portions of the time and spectrum windows in which
   they  intend to receive over a period of at least 10 milliseconds. The
   monitored time and spectrum window must total at least 50 percent of the 10
   millisecond frame interval and the monitored spectrum must be within 1.25
   MHz of the center frequency of channel(s) already occupied by that device or
   co-located co-operating devices. If the access criteria is met for the
   intended receive time and spectrum window under the above conditions, then
   transmission in the intended transmit window by the initiating device may
   commence.

   (12) The provisions of (c)(10) or (c)(11) of this section shall not be used
   to extend the range of spectrum occupied over space or time for the purpose
   of denying fair access to spectrum to other devices.

   (d) Emissions outside the sub-band shall be attenuated below a reference
   power of 112 milliwatts as follows: 30 dB between the sub-band and 1.25 MHz
   above or below the sub-band; 50 dB between 1.25 and 2.5 MHz above or below
   the sub-band; and 60 dB at 2.5 MHz or greater above or below the sub-band.
   Emissions inside the sub-band must comply with the following emission mask:
   In the bands between 1B and 2B measured from the center of the emission
   bandwidth the total power emitted by the device shall be at least 30 dB
   below the transmit power permitted for that device; in the bands between 2B
   and 3B measured from the center of the emission bandwidth the total power
   emitted  by  an intentional radiator shall be at least 50 dB below the
   transmit power permitted for that radiator; in the bands between 3B and the
   sub-band edge the total power emitted by an intentional radiator in the
   measurement bandwidth shall be at least 60 dB below the transmit power
   permitted for that radiator. “B” is defined as the emission bandwidth of the
   device in hertz. Compliance with the emission limits is based on the use of
   measurement  instrumentation  employing peak detector function with an
   instrument resolution bandwidth approximately equal to 1.0 percent of the
   emission bandwidth of the device under measurement.

   (e) The frame period (a set of consecutive time slots in which the position
   of each time slot can be identified by reference to a synchronizing source)
   of  an  intentional  radiator operating in these sub-bands shall be 20
   milliseconds or 10 milliseconds/X where X is a positive whole number. Each
   device that implements time division for the purposes of maintaining a
   duplex  connection on a given frequency carrier shall maintain a frame
   repetition rate with a frequency stability of at least 50 parts per million
   (ppm). Each device which further divides access in time in order to support
   multiple communication links on a given frequency carrier shall maintain a
   frame repetition rate with a frequency stability of at least 10 ppm. The
   jitter (time-related, abrupt, spurious variations in the duration of the
   frame interval) introduced at the two ends of such a communication link
   shall not exceed 25 microseconds for any two consecutive transmissions.
   Transmissions shall be continuous in every time and spectrum window during
   the frame period defined for the device.

   (f) The frequency stability of the carrier frequency of the intentional
   radiator shall be maintained within ±10 ppm over 1 hour or the interval
   between channel access monitoring, whichever is shorter. The frequency
   stability shall be maintained over a temperature variation of −20° to +50 °C
   at normal supply voltage, and over a variation in the primary supply voltage
   of 85 percent to 115 percent of the rated supply voltage at a temperature of
   20 °C. For equipment that is capable only of operating from a battery, the
   frequency stability tests shall be performed using a new battery without any
   further requirement to vary supply voltage.

   [ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993;  59 FR 15269 , Mar. 31, 1994. Redesignated at  59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994, as amended at  59 FR 32853 , June 24, 1994;  59 FR 40835 , Aug. 10, 1994;  59 FR 55373 , Nov. 7, 1994;  60 FR 3303 , Jan. 13, 1995;
    69 FR 62621 , Oct. 27, 2004]

Subpart E—Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure Devices

   top

§ 15.401   Scope.

   top

   This subpart sets out the regulations for unlicensed National Information
   Infrastructure (U-NII) devices operating in the 5.15–5.35 GHz, 5.47–5.725
   GHz and 5.7255.825 GHz bands.

   [ 69 FR 2686 , Jan. 20, 2004]

§ 15.403   Definitions.

   top

   (a) Access Point (AP). A U-NII transceiver that operates either as a bridge
   in  a  peer-to-peer connection or as a connector between the wired and
   wireless segments of the network.

   (b) Available Channel. A radio channel on which a Channel Availability Check
   has not identified the presence of a radar.

   (c) Average Symbol Envelope Power. The average symbol envelope power is the
   average, taken over all symbols in the signaling alphabet, of the envelope
   power for each symbol.

   (d)  Channel Availability Check. A check during which the U-NII device
   listens on a particular radio channel to identify whether there is a radar
   operating on that radio channel.

   (e)  Channel Move Time. The time needed by a U-NII device to cease all
   transmissions on the current channel upon detection of a radar signal above
   the DFS detection threshold.

   (f)  Digital modulation. The process by which the characteristics of a
   carrier wave are varied among a set of predetermined discrete values in
   accordance with a digital modulating function as specified in document ANSI
   C63.17–1998.

   (g)  Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a mechanism that dynamically
   detects signals from other systems and avoids co-channel operation with
   these systems, notably radar systems.

   (h)  DFS  Detection Threshold. The required detection level defined by
   detecting a received signal strength (RSS) that is greater than a threshold
   specified, within the U-NII device channel bandwidth.

   (i) Emission bandwidth. For purposes of this subpart the emission bandwidth
   shall be determined by measuring the width of the signal between two points,
   one below the carrier center frequency and one above the carrier center
   frequency,  that  are  26 dB down relative to the maximum level of the
   modulated carrier. Determination of the emissions bandwidth is based on the
   use of measurement instrumentation employing a peak detector function with
   an instrument resolution bandwidth approximately equal to 1.0 percent of the
   emission bandwidth of the device under measurement.

   (j) In-Service Monitoring. A mechanism to check a channel in use by the
   U-NII device for the presence of a radar.

   (k) Non-Occupancy Period. The required period in which, once a channel has
   been recognized as containing a radar signal by a U-NII device, the channel
   will not be selected as an available channel.

   (l) Operating Channel. Once a U-NII device starts to operate on an Available
   Channel then that channel becomes the Operating Channel.

   (m) Peak Power Spectral Density. The peak power spectral density is the
   maximum power spectral density, within the specified measurement bandwidth,
   within the U-NII device operating band.

   (n) Maximum Conducted Output Power. The total transmit power delivered to
   all  antennas  and antenna elements averaged across all symbols in the
   signaling alphabet when the transmitter is operating at its maximum power
   control  level.  Power  must be summed across all antennas and antenna
   elements. The average must not include any time intervals during which the
   transmitter is off or is transmitting at a reduced power level. If multiple
   modes of operation are possible ( e.g., alternative modulation methods), the
   maximum conducted output power is the highest total transmit power occurring
   in any mode.

   (o) Power Spectral Density. The power spectral density is the total energy
   output per unit bandwidth from a pulse or sequence of pulses for which the
   transmit  power  is at its peak or maximum level, divided by the total
   duration of the pulses. This total time does not include the time between
   pulses during which the transmit power is off or below its maximum level.

   (p) Pulse. A pulse is a continuous transmission of a sequence of modulation
   symbols, during which the average symbol envelope power is constant.

   (q) RLAN. Radio Local Area Network.

   (r) Transmit Power Control (TPC). A feature that enables a U-NII device to
   dynamically switch between several transmission power levels in the data
   transmission process.

   (s) U-NII devices. Intentional radiators operating in the frequency bands
   5.15–5.35 GHz and 5.4705.825 GHz that use wideband digital modulation
   techniques and provide a wide array of high data rate mobile and fixed
   communications for individuals, businesses, and institutions.

   [ 69 FR 2687 , Jan. 20, 2004, as amended at  69 FR 54036 , Sept. 7, 2004]

§ 15.405   Cross reference.

   top

   (a) The provisions of subparts A, B, and C of this part apply to unlicensed
   U-NII devices, except where specific provisions are contained in subpart E.
   Manufacturers should note that this includes the provisions of §§15.203 and
   15.205.

   (b)  The requirements of subpart E apply only to the radio transmitter
   contained in the U-NII device. Other aspects of the operation of a U-NII
   device may be subject to requirements contained elsewhere in this chapter.
   In particular, a U-NII device that includes digital circuitry not directly
   associated with the radio transmitter also is subject to the requirements
   for unintentional radiators in subpart B.

   [ 63 FR 40835 , July 31, 1998]

§ 15.407   General technical requirements.

   top

   (a) Power limits: 

   (1) For the band 5.155.25 GHz, the maximum conducted output power over the
   frequency band of operation shall not exceed the lesser of 50 mW or 4 dBm +
   10 log B, where B is the 26–dB emission bandwidth in MHz. In addition, the
   peak power spectral density shall not exceed 4 dBm in any 1–MHz band. If
   transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both
   the maximum conducted output power and the peak power spectral density shall
   be reduced by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna
   exceeds 6 dBi.

   (2) For the 5.25–5.35 GHz and 5.475.725 GHz bands, the maximum conducted
   output power over the frequency bands of operation shall not exceed the
   lesser  of  250 mW or 11 dBm + 10 log B, where B is the 26 dB emission
   bandwidth in megahertz. In addition, the peak power spectral density shall
   not exceed 11 dBm in any 1 megahertz band. If transmitting antennas of
   directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both the maximum conducted
   output power and the peak power spectral density shall be reduced by the
   amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi.

   (3) For the band 5.7255.825 GHz, the maximum conducted output power over
   the frequency band of operation shall not exceed the lesser of 1 W or 17 dBm
   + 10 log B, where B is the 26-dB emission bandwidth in MHz. In addition, the
   peak power spectral density shall not exceed 17 dBm in any 1–MHz band. If
   transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both
   the maximum conducted output power and the peak power spectral density shall
   be reduced by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna
   exceeds 6 dBi. However, fixed point-to-point U-NII devices operating in this
   band may employ transmitting antennas with directional gain up to 23 dBi
   without any corresponding reduction in the transmitter peak output power or
   peak power spectral density. For fixed, point-to-point U-NII transmitters
   that employ a directional antenna gain greater than 23 dBi, a 1 dB reduction
   in peak transmitter power and peak power spectral density for each 1 dB of
   antenna gain in excess of 23 dBi would be required. Fixed, point-to-point
   operations exclude the use of point-to-multipoint systems, omnidirectional
   applications, and multiple collocated transmitters transmitting the same
   information.  The operator of the U-NII device, or if the equipment is
   professionally installed, the installer, is responsible for ensuring that
   systems employing high gain directional antennas are used exclusively for
   fixed, point-to-point operations.

   Note to paragraph(a)(3): The Commission strongly recommends that parties
   employing U-NII devices to provide critical communications services should
   determine if there are any nearby Government radar systems that could affect
   their operation.

   (4) The maximum conducted output power must be measured over any interval of
   continuous transmission using instrumentation calibrated in terms of an
   rms-equivalent voltage. The measurement results shall be properly adjusted
   for any instrument limitations, such as detector response times, limited
   resolution bandwidth capability when compared to the emission bandwidth,
   sensitivity, etc., so as to obtain a true peak measurement conforming to the
   above definitions for the emission in question.

   (5) The peak power spectral density is measured as a conducted emission by
   direct connection of a calibrated test instrument to the equipment under
   test. If the device cannot be connected directly, alternative techniques
   acceptable to the Commission may be used. Measurements are made over a
   bandwidth of 1 MHz or the 26 dB emission bandwidth of the device, whichever
   is less. A resolution bandwidth less than the measurement bandwidth can be
   used, provided that the measured power is integrated to show total power
   over the measurement bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is approximately
   equal  to  the  measurement bandwidth, and much less than the emission
   bandwidth  of  the equipment under test, the measured results shall be
   corrected to account for any difference between the resolution bandwidth of
   the test instrument and its actual noise bandwidth.

   (6) The ratio of the peak excursion of the modulation envelope (measured
   using a peak hold function) to the maximum conducted output power (measured
   as specified above) shall not exceed 13 dB across any 1 MHz bandwidth or the
   emission bandwidth whichever is less.

   (b) Undesirable emission limits: Except as shown in paragraph (b)(6) of this
   section, the peak emissions outside of the frequency bands of operation
   shall be attenuated in accordance with the following limits:

   (1) For transmitters operating in the 5.15–5.25 GHz band: all emissions
   outside of the 5.15–5.35 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of –27 dBm/MHz.

   (2) For transmitters operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band: all emissions
   outside of the 5.15–5.35 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of –27 dBm/MHz.
   Devices operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band that generate emissions in the
   5.15–5.25 GHz band must meet all applicable technical requirements for
   operation in the 5.15–5.25 GHz band (including indoor use) or alternatively
   meet an out-of-band emission EIRP limit of –27 dBm/MHz in the 5.15–5.25 GHz
   band.

   (3) For transmitters operating in the 5.47–5.725 GHz band: all emissions
   outside of the 5.47–5.725 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of −27 dBm/MHz.

   (4) For transmitters operating in the 5.725–5.825 GHz band: all emissions
   within the frequency range from the band edge to 10 MHz above or below the
   band edge shall not exceed an EIRP of –17 dBm/MHz; for frequencies 10 MHz or
   greater above or below the band edge, emissions shall not exceed an EIRP of
   –27 dBm/MHz.

   (5) The emission measurements shall be performed using a minimum resolution
   bandwidth of 1 MHz. A lower resolution bandwidth may be employed near the
   band edge, when necessary, provided the measured energy is integrated to
   show the total power over 1 MHz.

   (6)  Unwanted emissions below 1 GHz must comply with the general field
   strength limits set forth in §15.209. Further, any U-NII devices using an AC
   power line are required to comply also with the conducted limits set forth
   in §15.207.

   (7) The provisions of §15.205 apply to intentional radiators operating under
   this section.

   (8) When measuring the emission limits, the nominal carrier frequency shall
   be adjusted as close to the upper and lower frequency block edges as the
   design of the equipment permits.

   (c) The device shall automatically discontinue transmission in case of
   either absence of information to transmit or operational failure. These
   provisions are not intended to preclude the transmission of control or
   signalling  information or the use of repetitive codes used by certain
   digital technologies to complete frame or burst intervals. Applicants shall
   include in their application for equipment authorization a description of
   how this requirement is met.

   (d) [Reserved]

   (e) Within the 5.15–5.25 GHz band, U-NII devices will be restricted to
   indoor  operations to reduce any potential for harmful interference to
   co-channel MSS operations.

   (f) U-NII devices are subject to the radio frequency radiation exposure
   requirements specified in §1.1307(b), §2.1091 and §2.1093 of this chapter,
   as appropriate. All equipment shall be considered to operate in a “general
   population/uncontrolled”   environment.   Applications  for  equipment
   authorization  of  devices operating under this section must contain a
   statement confirming compliance with these requirements for both fundamental
   emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing the basis
   for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon request.

   (g) Manufacturers of U-NII devices are responsible for ensuring frequency
   stability such that an emission is maintained within the band of operation
   under all conditions of normal operation as specified in the users manual.

   (h) Transmit Power Control (TPC) and Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS).

   (1) Transmit power control (TPC). U-NII devices operating in the 5.25–5.35
   GHz band and the 5.475.725 GHz band shall employ a TPC mechanism. The U-NII
   device is required to have the capability to operate at least 6 dB below the
   mean EIRP value of 30 dBm. A TPC mechanism is not required for systems with
   an e.i.r.p. of less than 500 mW.

   (2) Radar Detection Function of Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). U-NII
   devices operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz and 5.475.725 GHz bands shall employ
   a DFS radar detection mechanism to detect the presence of radar systems and
   to avoid co-channel operation with radar systems. The minimum DFS detection
   threshold for devices with a maximum e.i.r.p. of 200 mW to 1 W is −64 dBm.
   For  devices  that  operate with less than 200 mW e.i.r.p. the minimum
   detection threshold is −62 dBm. The detection threshold is the received
   power averaged over 1 microsecond referenced to a 0 dBi antenna. The DFS
   process shall be required to provide a uniform spreading of the loading over
   all the available channels.

   (i)  Operational  Modes.  The DFS requirement applies to the following
   operational modes:

   (A) The requirement for channel availability check time applies in the
   master operational mode.

   (B) The requirement for channel move time applies in both the master and
   slave operational modes.

   (ii) Channel Availability Check Time. A U-NII device shall check if there is
   a radar system already operating on the channel before it can initiate a
   transmission on a channel and when it has to move to a new channel. The
   U-NII device may start using the channel if no radar signal with a power
   level greater than the interference threshold values listed in paragraph
   (h)(2) of this part, is detected within 60 seconds.

   (iii)  Channel  Move  Time.  After a radar's presence is detected, all
   transmissions  shall cease on the operating channel within 10 seconds.
   Transmissions during this period shall consist of normal traffic for a
   maximum  of  200  ms after detection of the radar signal. In addition,
   intermittent management and control signals can be sent during the remaining
   time to facilitate vacating the operating channel.

   (iv) Non-occupancy Period. A channel that has been flagged as containing a
   radar  system,  either  by  a channel availability check or in-service
   monitoring, is subject to a non-occupancy period of at least 30 minutes. The
   non-occupancy period starts at the time when the radar system is detected.

   [ 63 FR 40836 , July 31, 1998, as amended at  69 FR 2687 , Jan. 20, 2004;  69 FR 54036 , Sept. 7, 2004]

Subpart F—Ultra-Wideband Operation

   top

   Source:    67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, unless otherwise noted.

§ 15.501   Scope.

   top

   This  subpart  sets  out the regulations for unlicensed ultra-wideband
   transmission systems.

§ 15.503   Definitions.

   top

   (a) UWB bandwidth. For the purpose of this subpart, the UWB bandwidth is the
   frequency  band bounded by the points that are 10 dB below the highest
   radiated emission, as based on the complete transmission system including
   the antenna. The upper boundary is designated f[H]and the lower boundary is
   designated f[L]. The frequency at which the highest radiated emission occurs
   is designated f[M].

   (b) Center frequency. The center frequency, f[C], equals (f[H]+ f[L])/2.

   (c) Fractional bandwidth. The fractional bandwidth equals 2(f[H]−f[L])/
   (f[H]+ f[L]).

   (d) Ultra-wideband (UWB) transmitter. An intentional radiator that, at any
   point in time, has a fractional bandwidth equal to or greater than 0.20 or
   has a UWB bandwidth equal to or greater than 500 MHz, regardless of the
   fractional bandwidth.

   (e) Imaging system. A general category consisting of ground penetrating
   radar systems, medical imaging systems, wall imaging systems through-wall
   imaging systems and surveillance systems. As used in this subpart, imaging
   systems do not include systems designed to detect the location of tags or
   systems used to transfer voice or data information.

   (f) Ground penetrating radar (GPR) system. A field disturbance sensor that
   is designed to operate only when in contact with, or within one meter of,
   the ground for the purpose of detecting or obtaining the images of buried
   objects or determining the physical properties within the ground. The energy
   from  the  GPR is intentionally directed down into the ground for this
   purpose.

   (g) Medical imaging system. A field disturbance sensor that is designed to
   detect the location or movement of objects within the body of a person or
   animal.

   (h) Wall imaging system. A field disturbance sensor that is designed to
   detect the location of objects contained within a “wall” or to determine the
   physical properties within the “wall.” The “wall” is a concrete structure,
   the side of a bridge, the wall of a mine or another physical structure that
   is  dense enough and thick enough to absorb the majority of the signal
   transmitted by the imaging system. This category of equipment does not
   include products such as “stud locators” that are designed to locate objects
   behind gypsum, plaster or similar walls that are not capable of absorbing
   the transmitted signal.

   (i) Through-wall imaging system. A field disturbance sensor that is designed
   to detect the location or movement of persons or objects that are located on
   the other side of an opaque structure such as a wall or a ceiling. This
   category of equipment may include products such as “stud locators” that are
   designed to locate objects behind gypsum, plaster or similar walls that are
   not thick enough or dense enough to absorb the transmitted signal.

   (j) Surveillance system. A field disturbance sensor used to establish a
   stationary RF perimeter field that is used for security purposes to detect
   the intrusion of persons or objects.

   (k) EIRP. Equivalent isotropically radiated power, i.e., the product of the
   power supplied to the antenna and the antenna gain in a given direction
   relative  to  an  isotropic antenna. The EIRP, in terms of dBm, can be
   converted to a field strength, in dBuV/m at 3 meters, by adding 95.2. As
   used in this subpart, EIRP refers to the highest signal strength measured in
   any  direction  and at any frequency from the UWB device, as tested in
   accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31(a) and 15.523 of this
   chapter.

   (l) Law enforcement, fire and emergency rescue organizations. As used in
   this subpart, this refers to those parties eligible to obtain a license from
   the FCC under the eligibility requirements specified in §90.20(a)(1) of this
   chapter.

   (m) Hand held. As used in this subpart, a hand held device is a portable
   device, such as a lap top computer or a PDA, that is primarily hand held
   while being operated and that does not employ a fixed infrastructure.

§ 15.505   Cross reference.

   top

   (a) Except where specifically stated otherwise within this subpart, the
   provisions of subparts A and B and of §§15.201 through 15.204 and 15.207 of
   subpart C of this part apply to unlicensed UWB intentional radiators. The
   provisions of §15.35(c) and 15.205 do not apply to devices operated under
   this subpart. The provisions of Footnote US 246 to the Table of Frequency
   Allocations contained in §2.106 of this chapter does not apply to devices
   operated under this subpart.

   (b) The requirements of this subpart apply only to the radio transmitter,
   i.e., the intentional radiator, contained in the UWB device. Other aspects
   of the operation of a UWB device may be subject to requirements contained
   elsewhere in this chapter. In particular, a UWB device that contains digital
   circuitry not directly associated with the operation of the transmitter also
   is subject to the requirements for unintentional radiators in subpart B of
   this part. Similarly, an associated receiver that operates (tunes) within
   the frequency range 30 MHz to 960 MHz is subject to the requirements in
   subpart B of this part.

§ 15.507   Marketing of UWB equipment.

   top

   In some cases, the operation of UWB devices is limited to specific parties,
   e.g., law enforcement, fire and rescue organizations operating under the
   auspices of a state or local government. The marketing of UWB devices must
   be  directed  solely to parties eligible to operate the equipment. The
   responsible party, as defined in §2.909 of this chapter, is responsible for
   ensuring that the equipment is marketed only to eligible parties. Marketing
   of  the  equipment  in  any other manner may be considered grounds for
   revocation of the grant of certification issued for the equipment.

§ 15.509   Technical requirements for ground penetrating radars and wall
imaging systems.

   top

   (a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
   this section must be below 10.6 GHz.

   (b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to GPRs and
   wall imaging systems operated for purposes associated with law enforcement,
   fire fighting, emergency rescue, scientific research, commercial mining, or
   construction.

   (1) Parties operating this equipment must be eligible for licensing under
   the provisions of part 90 of this chapter.

   (2)  The  operation  of  imaging  systems  under this section requires
   coordination, as detailed in §15.525.

   (c) A GPR that is designed to be operated while being hand held and a wall
   imaging system shall contain a manually operated switch that causes the
   transmitter to cease operation within 10 seconds of being released by the
   operator.  In  lieu  of  a switch located on the imaging system, it is
   permissible to operate an imaging system by remote control provided the
   imaging system ceases transmission within 10 seconds of the remote switch
   being released by the operator.

   (d) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
   §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               –65.3
   1610–1990              –53.3
   1990–3100              –51.3
   3100–10600             –41.3
   Above 10600            –51.3

   (e) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (d)  of  this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              –75.3
   1559–1610              –75.3

   (f)  For UWB devices where the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M], is above 960 MHz, there is a limit on the peak level
   of the emissions contained within a 50 MHz bandwidth centered on f[M]. That
   limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ a different resolution
   bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak emission limit, following
   the procedures described in §15.521.

   [ 68 FR 19749 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.510   Technical requirements for through D-wall imaging systems.

   top

   (a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
   this section must be below 960 MHz or the center frequency, f[C], and the
   frequency at which the highest radiated emission occurs, f[M], must be
   contained between 1990 MHz and 10600 MHz.

   (b)  Operation  under  the  provisions  of  this section is limited to
   through-wall imaging systems operated by law enforcement, emergency rescue
   or firefighting organizations that are under the authority of a local or
   state government.

   (c) For through-wall imaging systems operating with the UWB bandwidth below
   960 MHz:

   (1) Parties operating this equipment must be eligible for licensing under
   the provisions of part 90 of this chapter.

   (2)  The  operation of these imaging systems requires coordination, as
   detailed in §15.525.

   (3) The imaging system shall contain a manually operated switch that causes
   the transmitter to cease operation within 10 seconds of being released by
   the operator. In lieu of a switch located on the imaging system, it is
   permissible to operate an imaging system by remote control provided the
   imaging system ceases transmission within 10 seconds of the remote switch
   being released by the operator.

   (4) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
   levels in §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz shall not exceed the
   following average limits when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1
   MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −65.3
   1610–1990              −53.3
   Above 1990             −51.3

   (5) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph (c)(4) of this section, emissions from these imaging systems shall
   not exceed the following average limits when measured using a resolution
   bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −75.3
   1559–1610              −75.3

   (d) For equipment operating with f[C]and f[M]between 1990 MHz and 10600 MHz:

   (1) Parties operating this equipment must hold a license issued by the
   Federal Communications Commission to operate a transmitter in the Public
   Safety Radio Pool under part 90 of this chapter. The license may be held by
   the organization for which the UWB operator works on a paid or volunteer
   basis.

   (2) This equipment may be operated only for law enforcement applications,
   the providing of emergency services, and necessary training operations.

   (3) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
   levels in §15.209 of this chapter. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz
   shall  not  exceed  the following average limits when measured using a
   resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −46.3
   1610–10600             −41.3
   Above 10600            −51.3

   (4) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the paragraph
   (d)(3) of this section, emissions from these imaging systems shall not
   exceed  the  following average limits when measured using a resolution
   bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −56.3
   1559–1610              −56.3

   (5) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
   a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
   emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

   (e) Through-wall imaging systems operating under the provisions of this
   section shall bear the following or similar statement in a conspicuous
   location on the device: “Operation of this device is restricted to law
   enforcement, emergency rescue and firefighter personnel. Operation by any
   other party is a violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and could subject the operator
   to serious legal penalties.”

   [ 68 FR 19750 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.511   Technical requirements for surveillance systems.

   top

   (a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
   this section must be contained between 1990 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

   (b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to fixed
   surveillance systems operated by law enforcement, fire or emergency rescue
   organizations or by manufacturers licensees, petroleum licensees or power
   licensees as defined in §90.7 of this chapter.

   (1) Parties operating under the provisions of this section must be eligible
   for licensing under the provisions of part 90 of this chapter.

   (2)  The  operation  of  imaging  systems  under this section requires
   coordination, as detailed in §15.525.

   (c) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
   §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −53.3
   1610–1990              −51.3
   1990–10600             −41.3
   Above 10600            −51.3

   (d) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (c)  of  this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −63.3
   1559–1610              −63.3

   (e) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
   a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
   emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

   (f) Imaging systems operating under the provisions of this section shall
   bear the following or similar statement in a conspicuous location on the
   device: “Operation of this device is restricted to law enforcement, fire and
   rescue officials, public utilities, and industrial entities. Operation by
   any  other party is a violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and could subject the
   operator to serious legal penalties.”

   [ 68 FR 19750 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.513   Technical requirements for medical imaging systems.

   top

   (a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
   this section must be contained between 3100 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

   (b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to medical
   imaging systems used at the direction of, or under the supervision of, a
   licensed health care practitioner. The operation of imaging systems under
   this section requires coordination, as detailed in §15.525.

   (c) A medical imaging system shall contain a manually operated switch that
   causes  the  transmitter to cease operation within 10 seconds of being
   released by the operator. In lieu of a switch located on the imaging system,
   it is permissible to operate an imaging system by remote control provided
   the imaging system ceases transmission within 10 seconds of the remote
   switch being released by the operator.

   (d) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
   §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −65.3
   1610–1990              −53.3
   011990–3100            −51.3
   3100–10600             −41.3
   Above 10600            −51.3

   (e) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (d)  of  this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −75.3
   1559–1610              −53.3

   (f) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
   a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
   emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

   [ 68 FR 19751 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.515   Technical requirements for vehicular radar systems.

   top

   (a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to UWB field
   disturbance sensors mounted in terrestrial transportation vehicles. These
   devices shall operate only when the vehicle is operating, e.g., the engine
   is running. Operation shall occur only upon specific activation, such as
   upon starting the vehicle, changing gears, or engaging a turn signal.

   (b)  The UWB bandwidth of a vehicular radar system operating under the
   provisions of this section shall be contained between 22 GHz and 29 GHz. In
   addition, the center frequency, f[C], and the frequency at which the highest
   level emission occurs, f[M], must be greater than 24.075 GHz.

   (c) Following proper installation, vehicular radar systems shall attenuate
   any  emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band that appear 38 degrees or
   greater above the horizontal plane by 25 dB below the limit specified in
   paragraph (d) of this section. For equipment authorized, manufactured or
   imported on or after January 1, 2005, this level of attenuation shall be 25
   dB for any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band that appear 30 degrees or
   greater above the horizontal plane. For equipment authorized, manufactured
   or imported on or after January 1, 2010, this level of attenuation shall be
   30 dB for any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band that appear 30 degrees
   or  greater  above  the  horizontal  plane.  For equipment authorized,
   manufactured  or  imported  on or after January 1, 2014, this level of
   attenuation shall be 35 dB for any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band
   that appear 30 degrees or greater above the horizontal plane. This level of
   attenuation can be achieved through the antenna directivity, through a
   reduction in output power or any other means.

   (d) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
   §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −75.3
   1610–22,000            −61.3
   22,000–29,000          −41.3
   29,000–31,000          −51.3
   Above 31,000           −61.3

   (e) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (d)  of  this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −85.3
   1559–1610              −85.3

   (f) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
   a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
   emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

   (g) The emission levels from devices operating under the provisions of this
   section that employ gated transmissions may be measured with the gating
   active. Measurements made in this manner shall be repeated over multiple
   sweeps  with  the  analyzer  set  for maximum hold until the amplitude
   stabilizes.

   [ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, as amended at  70 FR 6776 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.517   Technical requirements for indoor UWB systems.

   top

   (a)  Operation  under the provisions of this section is limited to UWB
   transmitters employed solely for indoor operation.

   (1) Indoor UWB devices, by the nature of their design, must be capable of
   operation  only  indoors. The necessity to operate with a fixed indoor
   infrastructure, e.g., a transmitter that must be connected to the AC power
   lines, may be considered sufficient to demonstrate this.

   (2) The emissions from equipment operated under this section shall not be
   intentionally directed outside of the building in which the equipment is
   located,  such as through a window or a doorway, to perform an outside
   function, such as the detection of persons about to enter a building.

   (3) The use of outdoor mounted antennas, e.g., antennas mounted on the
   outside  of  a  building or on a telephone pole, or any other outdoors
   infrastructure is prohibited.

   (4) Field disturbance sensors installed inside of metal or underground
   storage tanks are considered to operate indoors provided the emissions are
   directed towards the ground.

   (5)  A  communications system shall transmit only when the intentional
   radiator is sending information to an associated receiver.

   (b) The UWB bandwidth of a UWB system operating under the provisions of this
   section must be contained between 3100 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

   (c) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
   §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −75.3
   1610–1990              −53.3
   1990–3100              −51.3
   3100–10600             −41.3
   Above 10600            −51.3

   (d) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (c)  of  this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −85.3
   1559–1610              −85.3

   (e) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
   a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
   emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

   (f) UWB systems operating under the provisions of this section shall bear
   the following or similar statement in a conspicuous location on the device
   or in the instruction manual supplied with the device:

   “This equipment may only be operated indoors. Operation outdoors is in
   violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and could subject the operator to serious legal
   penalties.”

   [ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002;  67 FR 39632 , June 10, 2002]

§ 15.519   Technical requirements for hand held UWB systems.

   top

   (a) UWB devices operating under the provisions of this section must be hand
   held, i.e., they are relatively small devices that are primarily hand held
   while being operated and do not employ a fixed infrastructure.

   (1)  A UWB device operating under the provisions of this section shall
   transmit only when it is sending information to an associated receiver. The
   UWB intentional radiator shall cease transmission within 10 seconds unless
   it  receives  an acknowledgement from the associated receiver that its
   transmission is being received. An acknowledgment of reception must continue
   to be received by the UWB intentional radiator at least every 10 seconds or
   the UWB device must cease transmitting.

   (2)  The use of antennas mounted on outdoor structures, e.g., antennas
   mounted on the outside of a building or on a telephone pole, or any fixed
   outdoors infrastructure is prohibited. Antennas may be mounted only on the
   hand held UWB device.

   (3) UWB devices operating under the provisions of this section may operate
   indoors or outdoors.

   (b) The UWB bandwidth of a device operating under the provisions of this
   section must be contained between 3100 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

   (c) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
   §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
   the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   960–1610               −75.3
   1610–1990              −63.3
   1990–3100              −61.3
   3100–10600             −41.3
   Above 10600            −61.3

   (d) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
   paragraph  (c)  of  this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
   provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
   when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
   Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
   1164–1240              −85.3
   1559–1610              −85.3

   (e) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
   50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
   emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
   a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
   emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

   [ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002;  67 FR 39632 , June 10, 2002]

§ 15.521   Technical requirements applicable to all UWB devices.

   top

   (a) UWB devices may not be employed for the operation of toys. Operation
   onboard an aircraft, a ship or a satellite is prohibited.

   (b) Manufacturers and users are reminded of the provisions of §§15.203 and
   15.204.

   (c) Emissions from digital circuitry used to enable the operation of the UWB
   transmitter shall comply with the limits in §15.209, rather than the limits
   specified in this subpart, provided it can be clearly demonstrated that
   those emissions from the UWB device are due solely to emissions from digital
   circuitry contained within the transmitter and that the emissions are not
   intended to be radiated from the transmitter's antenna. Emissions from
   associated digital devices, as defined in §15.3(k), e.g., emissions from
   digital circuitry used to control additional functions or capabilities other
   than the UWB transmission, are subject to the limits contained in Subpart B
   of this part.

   (d) Within the tables in §§15.509, 15.511, 15.513, 15.515, 15.517, and
   15.519, the tighter emission limit applies at the band edges. Radiated
   emission levels at and below 960 MHz are based on measurements employing a
   CISPR quasi-peak detector. Radiated emission levels above 960 MHz are based
   on RMS average measurements over a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth. The RMS
   average  measurement is based on the use of a spectrum analyzer with a
   resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz, an RMS detector, and a 1 millisecond or less
   averaging time. Unless otherwise stated, if pulse gating is employed where
   the transmitter is quiescent for intervals that are long compared to the
   nominal pulse repetition interval, measurements shall be made with the pulse
   train gated on. Alternative measurement procedures may be considered by the
   Commission.

   (e) The frequency at which the highest radiated emission occurs, f[M], must
   be contained within the UWB bandwidth.

   (f)  Imaging  systems may be employed only for the type of information
   exchange described in their specific definitions contained in §15.503. The
   detection  of tags or the transfer or data or voice information is not
   permitted under the standards for imaging systems.

   (g)  When  a  peak  measurement is required, it is acceptable to use a
   resolution bandwidth other than the 50 MHz specified in this subpart. This
   resolution bandwidth shall not be lower than 1 MHz or greater than 50 MHz,
   and the measurement shall be centered on the frequency at which the highest
   radiated emission occurs, f[M]. If a resolution bandwidth other than 50 MHz
   is employed, the peak EIRP limit shall be 20 log (RBW/50) dBm where RBW is
   the  resolution  bandwidth  in megahertz that is employed. This may be
   converted to a peak field strength level at 3 meters using E(dBuV/m) = P(dBm
   EIRP)  +  95.2.  If  RBW  is  greater  than 3 MHz, the application for
   certification filed with the Commission must contain a detailed description
   of  the  test  procedure,  calibration  of  the  test  setup,  and the
   instrumentation employed in the testing.

   (h) The highest frequency employed in §15.33 to determine the frequency
   range over which radiated measurements are made shall be based on the center
   frequency, f[C], unless a higher frequency is generated within the UWB
   device. For measuring emission levels, the spectrum shall be investigated
   from the lowest frequency generated in the UWB transmitter, without going
   below 9 kHz, up to the frequency range shown in §15.33(a) or up to f[C]+
   3/(pulse width in seconds), whichever is higher. There is no requirement to
   measure emissions beyond 40 GHz provided f[C]is less than 10 GHz; beyond 100
   GHz if f[C]is at or above 10 GHz and below 30 GHz; or beyond 200 GHz if
   f[C]is at or above 30 GHz.

   (i) The prohibition in §2.201(f) and 15.5(d) of this chapter against Class B
   (damped wave) emissions does not apply to UWB devices operating under this
   subpart.

   (j) Responsible parties are reminded of the other standards and requirements
   cross referenced in §15.505, such as a limit on emissions conducted onto the
   AC power lines.

   [ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, as amended at  68 FR 19751 , Apr. 22, 2003;  70 FR 6776 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.523   Measurement procedures.

   top

   Measurements shall be made in accordance with the procedures specified by
   the Commission.

§ 15.525   Coordination requirements.

   top

   (a) UWB imaging systems require coordination through the FCC before the
   equipment may be used. The operator shall comply with any constraints on
   equipment usage resulting from this coordination.

   (b) The users of UWB imaging devices shall supply operational areas to the
   FCC  Office of Engineering and Technology, which shall coordinate this
   information   with   the   Federal  Government  through  the  National
   Telecommunications and Information Administration. The information provided
   by the UWB operator shall include the name, address and other pertinent
   contact  information  of the user, the desired geographical area(s) of
   operation, and the FCC ID number and other nomenclature of the UWB device.
   If the imaging device is intended to be used for mobile applications, the
   geographical area(s) of operation may be the state(s) or county(ies) in
   which the equipment will be operated. The operator of an imaging system used
   for fixed operation shall supply a specific geographical location or the
   address at which the equipment will be operated. This material shall be
   submitted to Frequency Coordination Branch, OET, Federal Communications
   Commission,  445  12th  Street,  SW, Washington, D.C. 20554, Attn: UWB
   Coordination.

   (c)  The  manufacturers, or their authorized sales agents, must inform
   purchasers  and users of their systems of the requirement to undertake
   detailed  coordination  of operational areas with the FCC prior to the
   equipment being operated.

   (d) Users of authorized, coordinated UWB systems may transfer them to other
   qualified users and to different locations upon coordination of change of
   ownership or location to the FCC and coordination with existing authorized
   operations.

   (e) The FCC/NTIA coordination report shall identify those geographical areas
   within  which  the  operation of an imaging system requires additional
   coordination  or  within  which  the operation of an imaging system is
   prohibited. If additional coordination is required for operation within
   specific geographical areas, a local coordination contact will be provided.
   Except for operation within these designated areas, once the information
   requested on the UWB imaging system is submitted to the FCC no additional
   coordination  with  the FCC is required provided the reported areas of
   operation  do  not  change.  If the area of operation changes, updated
   information  shall  be submitted to the FCC following the procedure in
   paragraph (b) of this section.

   (f) The coordination of routine UWB operations shall not take longer than 15
   business days from the receipt of the coordination request by NTIA. Special
   temporary operations may be handled with an expedited turn-around time when
   circumstances warrant. The operation of UWB systems in emergency situations
   involving the safety of life or property may occur without coordination
   provided a notification procedure, similar to that contained in §2.405(a)
   through (e) of this chapter, is followed by the UWB equipment user.

   [ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, as amended at  68 FR 19751 , Apr. 22, 2003]

Subpart G—Access Broadband Over Power Line (Access BPL)

   top

   Source:    70 FR 1374 , Jan. 7, 2005, unless otherwise noted.

§ 15.601   Scope.

   top

   This subpart sets out the regulations for Access Broadband over Power Line
   (Access BPL) devices operating in the 1.705–80 MHz band over medium or low
   voltage lines.

§ 15.603   Definitions.

   top

   (a) Excluded Band: A band of frequencies within which Access BPL operations
   are not permitted.

   (b) Exclusion Zone: A geographical area within which Access BPL operations
   are not permitted in certain frequency bands.

   (c) Consultation. The process of communication between an entity operating
   Access BPL and a licensed public safety or other designated point of contact
   for the purpose of avoiding potential harmful interference.

   (d)  Consultation  area:  A  designated geographical area within which
   consultation with public safety users or other designated point of contact
   is required before an Access BPL may be operated at designated frequencies.

   (e)  Low Voltage power line. A power line carrying low voltage, e.g. ,
   240/120 volts from a distribution transformer to a customer's premises.

   (f) Medium Voltage power line. A power line carrying between 1,000 to 40,000
   volts from a power substation to neighborhoods. Medium voltage lines may be
   overhead or underground, depending on the power grid network topology.

   (g)  Access BPL Database. A database operated by an industry-sponsored
   entity, recognized by the Federal Communications Commission and the National
   Telecommunications  and  Information Administration (NTIA), containing
   information regarding existing and planned Access BPL systems, as required
   in §15.615(a) of this chapter.

§ 15.605   Cross reference.

   top

   (a) The provisions of subparts A and B of this part apply to Access BPL
   devices, except where specifically noted. The provisions of subparts C
   through F of this part do not apply to Access BPL devices except where
   specifically noted.

   (b) The requirements of this subpart apply only to the radio circuitry that
   is used to provide carrier current operation for the Access BPL device.
   Other aspects of the operation of an Access BPL device may be subject to
   requirements contained elsewhere in this chapter. In particular, an Access
   BPL device that includes digital circuitry that is not used solely to enable
   the operation of the radio frequency circuitry used to provide carrier
   current operation also is subject to the requirements for unintentional
   radiators in subpart B of this part.

§ 15.607   Equipment authorization of Access BPL equipment.

   top

   Access BPL equipment shall be subject to Certification as specified in
   §15.101.

§ 15.609   Marketing of Access BPL equipment.

   top

   The marketing of Access BPL equipment must be directed solely to parties
   eligible to operate the equipment. Eligible parties consist of AC power line
   public utilities, Access BPL service providers and associates of Access BPL
   service providers. The responsible party, as defined in §2.909 of this
   chapter, is responsible for ensuring that the equipment is marketed only to
   eligible parties. Marketing of the equipment in any other manner may be
   considered grounds for revocation of the grant of certification issued for
   the equipment.

§ 15.611   General technical requirements.

   top

   (a) Conducted emission limits. Access BPL is not subject to the conducted
   emission limits of §15.107.

   (b) Radiated emission limits —(1) Medium voltage power lines. (i) Access BPL
   systems that operate in the frequency range of 1.705 kHz to 30 MHz over
   medium voltage power lines shall comply with the radiated emission limits
   for intentional radiators provided in §15.209.

   (ii) Access BPL systems that operate in the frequency range above 30 MHz
   over medium voltage power lines shall comply with the radiated emission
   limits provided in §15.109(b).

   (2)  Low  voltage  power  lines.  Access BPL systems that operate over
   low-voltage power lines, including those that operate over low-voltage lines
   that are connected to the in-building wiring, shall comply with the radiated
   emission limits provided in §15.109(a) and (e).

   (c) Interference Mitigation and Avoidance. (1) Access BPL systems shall
   incorporate adaptive interference mitigation techniques to remotely reduce
   power and adjust operating frequencies, in order to avoid site-specific,
   local use of the same spectrum by licensed services. These techniques may
   include adaptive or “notch” filtering, or complete avoidance of frequencies,
   or bands of frequencies, locally used by licensed radio operations.

   (i) For frequencies below 30 MHz, when a notch filter is used to avoid
   interference to a specific frequency band, the Access BPL system shall be
   capable of attenuating emissions within that band to a level at least 20 dB
   below the applicable part 15 limits.

   (ii) For frequencies above 30 MHz, when a notch filter is used to avoid
   interference to a specific frequency band, the Access BPL system shall be
   capable of attenuating emissions within that band to a level at least 10 dB
   below the applicable part 15 limits.

   (iii)  At  locations  where an Access BPL operator attenuates radiated
   emissions  from  its  operations in accordance with the above required
   capabilities, we will not require that operator to take further actions to
   resolve complaints of harmful interference to mobile operations.

   (2) Access BPL systems shall comply with applicable radiated emission limits
   upon power-up following a fault condition, or during a start-up operation
   after a shut-off procedure, by the use of a non-volatile memory, or some
   other method, to immediately restore previous settings with programmed
   notches and excluded bands, to avoid time delay caused by the need for
   manual re-programming during which protected services may be vulnerable.

   (3) Access BPL systems shall incorporate a remote-controllable shut-down
   feature to deactivate, from a central location, any unit found to cause
   harmful interference, if other interference mitigation techniques do not
   resolve the interference problem.

   [ 70 FR 1374 , Jan. 7, 2005, as amended at  71 FR 49379 , Aug. 23, 2006]

§ 15.613   Measurement procedures.

   top

   Compliance measurements for Access BPL shall be made in accordance with the
   Guidelines for Access BPL systems specified by the Commission.

§ 15.615   General administrative requirements.

   top

   (a) Access BPL Database. Entities operating Access BPL systems shall supply
   to an industry-recognized entity, information on all existing Access BPL
   systems and all proposed Access BPL systems for inclusion into a publicly
   available data base, within 30 days prior to initiation of service. Such
   information shall include the following:

   (1) The name of the Access BPL provider.

   (2) The frequencies of the Access BPL operation.

   (3) The postal zip codes served by the specific Access BPL operation.

   (4) The manufacturer and type of Access BPL equipment and its associated FCC
   ID number, or, in the case of Access BPL equipment that has been subject to
   verification, the Trade Name and Model Number, as specified on the equipment
   label.

   (5) The contact information, including both phone number and e-mail address
   of  a  person  at,  or associated with, the BPL operator's company, to
   facilitate the resolution of any interference complaint.

   (6) The proposed/or actual date of Access BPL operation.

   (b) The Access BPL database manager shall enter this information into the
   publicly accessible database within three (3) business days of receipt.

   (c) No notification to the Commission is required.

   (d) A licensed spectrum user experiencing harmful interference that is
   suspected to be caused by an Access BPL system shall inform the local BPL
   operator's  contact  person designated in the Access BPL database. The
   investigation of the reported interference and the resolution of confirmed
   harmful  interference from the Access BPL system shall be successfully
   completed by the BPL operator within a reasonable time period according to a
   mutually  acceptable  schedule,  after  the receipt of an interference
   complaint, in order to avoid protracted disruptions to licensed services.
   The Access BPL operator shall respond to complaints of harmful interference
   from public safety users within 24 hours. With regard to public safety
   complaints, the BPL provider shall be required to immediately cease the
   operations causing such complaint if it fails to respond within 24 hours.

   (e) Consultation with public safety users. An entity operating an Access BPL
   system shall notify and consult with the public safety users in the area
   where it plans to deploy Access BPL, at least 30 days prior to initiation of
   any operation or service. This entity shall design or implement the Access
   BPL  system  such that it does not cause harmful interference in those
   frequencies or bands used by the public safety agencies in the area served
   by the Access BPL system. The notification shall include, at a minimum, the
   information in paragraph (a) of this section.

   (f) Federal government spectrum users and other radio service users. An
   entity operating an Access BPL system shall ensure that, within its Access
   BPL  deployment  area,  its system does not operate on any frequencies
   designated  as  excluded bands or on identified frequencies within any
   designated exclusion zones.

   (1) Excluded Bands. To protect Aeronautical (land) stations and aircraft
   receivers, Access BPL operations using overhead medium voltage power lines
   are prohibited in the frequency bands listed in Table 1. Specifically, such
   BPL systems shall not place carrier frequencies in these bands.

   Table 1—Excluded Frequency Bands
    Frequency band
   2,850–3,025 kHz
   3,400–3,500 kHz
   4,650–4,700 kHz
   5,450–5,680 kHz
   6,525–6,685 kHz
   8,815–8,965 kHz
   10,005–10,100 kHz
   11,275–11,400 kHz
   13,260–13,360 kHz
   17,900–17,970 kHz
   21,924–22,000 kHz
   74.8–75.2 MHz

   (2) Exclusion zones . Exclusion zones encompass the operation of any Access
   BPL system within 1km of the boundary of coast station facilities at the
   coordinates listed in Tables 2 and 2.1. Exclusion zones also encompass the
   operation of Access BPL systems using overhead medium voltage power lines
   within 65 km of the Very Large Array observatory located at the coordinate
   34°04'43.50"; N, 107°37'03.82" W. Exclusion zones further encompass the
   operation of Access BPL systems using overhead low voltage power lines or
   underground power lines within 47 km of the Very Large Array observatory
   located at the coordinate 34°04'43.50"; N, 107°37' 03.82" W. Within the
   exclusion zones for coast stations, Access BPL systems shall not use carrier
   frequencies within the band of 2173.52190.5 kHz. Within the exclusion zone
   for the Very Large Array radio astronomy observatory, Access BPL systems
   shall not use carrier frequencies within the 73.0–74.6 MHz band.

   (i) Existing coast station facilities. Access BPL systems shall not operate
   in the frequency band 2,173.5–2,190.5 kHz, within 1 kilometer (km) of the
   boundary of coast station facilities at the coordinates listed in Tables 2
   and  2.1. BPL operators planning to deploy Access BPL devices at these
   frequencies in areas within these exclusion zones as defined above shall
   consult with the appropriate point of contact for these coast stations to
   ensure harmful interference is prevented at these facilities.

   Point of contact: Commandant (CG 622), U.S. Coast Guard, 2100 2nd Street,
   SW.,  Washington,  DC  20593–0001,  Telephone: (202) 267–2860, e-mail:
   cgcomms@comdt.uscg.mil. 

   Table 2—Exclusion Zones for U.S. Coast Guard Coast Stations
                  Locale                 Latitude    Longitude
   Group Guam                           13°35'23" N 144°50'24" E
   GANTSEC                              18°18'00" N 65°46'59" W
   Puerto Rico                          18°28'11" N 66°07'47" W
   Honolulu                             21°18'21" N 157°53'23" W
   Group Key West                       24°33'35" N 81°47'59" W
   Trumbo Point CG Base                 24°33'58" N 81°47'57" W
   Miami                                25°37'28" N 80°23'07" W
   Everglades Park                      25°50'10" N 81°23'13" W
   Group Saint Petersburg (Everglades)  25°51'00" N 81°23'24" W
   Station Ft. Lauderdale               26°05'21" N 80°06'40" W
   Station Ft. Myers Beach              26°27'34" N 81°57'15" W
   Group Miami (Ft. Pierce)             27°27'36" N 80°18'36" W
   Station Ft. Pierce                   27°27'50" N 80°18'27" W
   Group Corpus Christi                 27°42'01" N 97°16'11" W
   Group Corpus Christi                 27°42'06" N 97°16'45" W
   ESD Saint Petersburg                 27°45'21" N 82°37'32" W
   Group Saint Petersburg               27°46'11" N 82°37'47" W
   Station Port O'Connor                28°26'03" N 96°25'39" W
   S. Padre Island                      28°26'22" N 97°09'56" W
   Freeport                             28°55'59" N 95°16'59" W
   Group Galveston (Freeport)           28°56'24" N 95°17'59" W
   Station YANKEETOWN                   29°01'51" N 82°43'39" W
   Station Ponce De Leon Inlet          29°03'50" N 81°55'01" W
   Group New Orleans (Grand Isle)       29°15'53" N 89°57'26" W
   Galveston                            29°19'59" N 94°46'18" W
   Kapalan                              29°20'04" N 94°47'17" W
   Sabine                               29°43'42" N 93°52'14" W
   New Orleans                          30°01'17" N 90°07'24" W
   Panama City                          30°10'01" N 85°45'04" W
   Group Mobile (Panama City)           30°10'12" N 85°45'36" W
   ANT Jacksonville Beach               30°17'16" N 81°24'10" W
   Pensacola                            30°20'24" N 87°18'17" W
   Group Mayport                        30°23'10" N 81°26'01" W
   Group Mayport                        30°23'24" N 81°25'48" W
   Ft. Morgan                           30°39'07" N 88°03'12" W
   Tybee Lighthouse                     32°01'15" N 80°50'39" W
   Point Loma Lighthouse                32°39'56" N 117°14'34" W
   Point Loma                           32°40'07" N 117°14'14" W
   Activities San Diego                 32°43'59" N 117°11'13" W
   Group Charleston (Sullivan's Island) 32°45'00" N 79°49'47" W
   Sullivan's Island Lights             32°45'02" N 79°50'03" W
   Group Charleston                     32°46'25" N 79°56'37" W
   Group San Diego                      32°52'48" N 118°26'23" W
   San Pedro                            33°45'00" N 118°15'58" W
   Group Fort Macon                     33°53'24" N 78°01'48" W
   Point Mugu                           33°59'32" N 119°07'18" W
   Group LA/Long Beach                  34°07'11" N 119°06'35" W
   Channel Island                       34°09'17" N 119°13'11" W
   Station Oxnard Channel Island        34°09'43" N 119°13'19" W
   Group Ft. Macon                      34°41'48" N 76°40'59" W
   Group Cape Hatteras                  35°13'59" N 75°31'59" W
   Group Cape Hatteras                  35°15'35" N 75°31'48" W
   Morro Bay (Cambria)                  35°31'21" N 121°03'31" W
   San Clemente Island                  32°50'24" N 118°23'15" W
   Point Pinos                          36°38'12" N 121°56'06" W
   CAMSLANT                             36°43'47" N 76°01'11" W
   Group Hampton Roads                  36°53'01" N 76°21'10" W
   Point Montara                        37°31'23" N 122°30'47" W
   Point Montara Lighthouse             37°32'09" N 122°31'08" W
   Group San Francisco                  37°32'23" N 122°31'11" W
   Group San Francisco                  37°48'34" N 122°21'55" W
   Point Bonita                         37°49'00" N 122°31'41" W
   Group Eastern Shores                 37°55'47" N 75°22'47" W
   Group Eastern Shore                  37°55'50" N 75°22'58" W
   CAMSPAC                              38°06'00" N 122°55'48" W
   Point Arena Lighthouse               38°57'18" N 124°44'28" W
   Point Arena                          38°57'36" N 123°44'23" W
   Group Atlantic City                  39°20'59" N 74°27'42" W
   Activities New York                  40°36'06" N 74°03'36" W
   Activities New York                  40°37'11" N 74°04'11" W
   ESD Moriches Hut                     40°47'19" N 72°44'53" W
   Group Moriches                       40°47'23" N 72°45'00" W
   Group Humboldt Bay                   40°58'41" N 124°06'31" W
   Group Humboldt Bay                   40°58'47" N 124°06'35" W
   Trinidad Head                        41°03'15" N 124°09'02" W
   Group Long Island Sound              41°16'12" N 72°54'00" W
   Station New Haven                    41°16'12" N 72°54'06" W
   Station Brant Point                  41°17'21" N 70°05'31" W
   Group Woods Hole                     41°17'23" N 70°04'47" W
   Station Castle Hill                  41°27'46" N 71°21'42" W
   Group Woods Hole                     41°17'29" N 70°401'07" W
   Boston Area                          41°40'12" N 70°31'48" W
   Station Provincetown                 42°01'48" N 70°12'42" W
   Eastern Point                        42°36'24" N 70°39'26" W
   Cape Blanco                          42°50'16" N 124°33'52" W
   Group North Bend                     43°24'16" N 124°13'22" W
   Group North Bend                     43°24'35" N 124°14'23" W
   Cape Elizabeth                       43°33'28" N 70°12'00" W
   Group South Portland                 43°38'24" N 70°15'00" W
   Group South Portland                 43°38'45" N 70°14'51" W
   Group SW Harbor                      44°16'19" N 68°18'27" W
   Group Southwest Harbor               44°16'48" N 68°18'36" W
   Fort Stevens, Oregon                 46°09'14" N 123°53'07" W
   Group Astoria                        46°09'29" N 123°31'48" W
   Group Astoria                        46°09'35" N 123°53'24" W
   La Push                              47°49'00" N 124°37'59" W
   Station Quillayute River             47°54'49" N 124°38'01" W
   Port Angeles                         48°07'59" N 123°25'59" W
   Group Port Angeles                   48°08'24" N 123°24'35" W
   Juneau (Sitka)                       57°05'24" N 135°15'35" W
   Kodiak                               57°40'47" N 152°28'47" W
   Valdez (Cape Hinchinbrook)           60°26'23" N 146°25'48" W

   Note:Systems of coordinates comply with NAD 83.

   Table 2.1—Exclusion Zones for Maritime Public Coast Stations

   [Points of Contact Are Identified in the Commission's License Database]
         Licensee name             Location       Latitude    Longitude
   Shipcom LLC                Marina Del Ray, CA 33°56'21" N 118°27'14" W
   Globe Wireless             Rio Vista, CA      38°11'55" N 121°48'34" W
   Avalon Communications Corp St. Thomas, VI     18°21'19" N 64°56'48" W
   Globe Wireless             Bishopville, MD    38°24'10" N 75°12'59" W
   Shipcom LLC                Mobile, AL         30°40'07" N 88°10'23" W
   Shipcom LLC                Coden, AL          30°22'35" N 88°12'20" W
   Globe Wireless             Pearl River, LA    30°22'13" N 89°47'26" W
   Globe Wireless             Kahalelani, HI     21°10'33" N 157°10'39" W
   Globe Wireless             Palo Alto, CA      37°26'44" N 122°06'48" W
   Globe Wireless             Agana, GU          13°29'22" N 144°49'39" E

   Note: Systems of coordinates comply with NAD 83.

   (ii) New or relocated Coast stations. In the unlikely event that a new or
   relocated coast station is established for the 2.173.5–2.190.5 kHz band at a
   coordinate not specified in Table 2 or 2.1, Access BPL operations in that
   frequency band shall also be excluded within 1 km of the new coast station
   facility;

   (3) Consultation areas . Access BPL operators shall provide notification to
   the appropriate point of contact specified regarding Access BPL operations
   at any frequencies of potential concern in the following consultation areas,
   at  least 30 days prior to initiation of any operation or service. The
   notification shall include, at a minimum, the information in paragraph (a)
   of this section. We expect parties to consult in good faith to ensure that
   no  harmful interference is caused to licensed operations and that any
   constraints on BPL deployments are minimized to those necessary to avoid
   harmful  interference.  In  the unlikely event that a new or relocated
   aeronautical receive station is established for the 1.7–30 MHz band at a
   coordinate not specified in Table 3b, Access BPL operators are also required
   to coordinate with the appropriate point of contact regarding Access BPL
   operations at any frequencies of potential concern in the new or relocated
   consultation areas, and to adjust their system operating parameters to
   protect the new or relocated aeronautical receive station.

   (i) For frequencies in the 1.7–30 MHz frequency range, the areas within 4 km
   of facilities located at the following coordinates:

   (A) The Commission's protected field offices listed in 47 CFR 0.121, the
   point-of-contact for which is specified in that section;

   (B) The aeronautical stations listed in Tables 3a and 3b;

   (C) The land stations listed in Tables 4 and 5;

   (ii) For frequencies in the 1.7–80.0 MHz frequency range, the areas within 4
   km of facilities located at the coordinates specified for radio astronomy
   facilities in 47 CFR 2.106, Note U.S. 311.

   Point  of  contact: Electromagnetic Spectrum Manager, National Science
   Foundation, Division of Astronomical Sciences, 4201 Wilson Blvd., Suite
   1045, Arlington, VA 22230, (703) 292–4896, esm@nsf.gov .

   (iii) For frequencies in the 1.7–80 MHz frequency range, the area within 1
   km of the Table Mountain Radio Receiving Zone, the coordinates and point of
   contact for which are specified in 47 CFR 21.113(b).

   (iv) For frequencies in the 1.7–30 MHz frequency range, the areas within 37
   km of radar receiver facilities located at the coordinates specified in
   Table 6.

   Point of contact: U.S. Coast Guard HQ, Division of Spectrum Management
   CG–622, 2100 Second St., SW., Rm. 6611, Washington, DC 20593, Tel: (202)
   267–6036, Fax: (202) 267–4106, e-mail: jtaboada@comdt.uscg.mil. 

   Table  3a—Consultation Area Coordinates for Aeronautical (OR) Stations
   (1.7–30 MHz)
    Command name       Location       Latitude     Longitude
   Washington     Arlington, VA      38°51'07" N 77°02'15" W
   Cape Cod       Cape Cod, MA       41°42'00" N 70°30'00" W
   Atlantic City  Atlantic City, NJ  39°20'59" N 74°27'42" W
   Elizabeth City Elizabeth City, NC 36°15'53" N 76°10'32" W
   Savannah       Savannah, GA       32°01'30" N 81°08'30" W
   Miami          Opa Locka, FL      25°54'22" N 80°16'01" W
   Clearwater     Clearwater, FL     27°54'27" N 82°41' 29" W
   Borinquen      Aguadilla, PR      18°18'36" N 67°04' 48" W
   New Orleans    New Orleans, LA    29°49'31" N 90°02' 06" W
   Traverse City  Traverse City, MI  44°44'24" N 85°34'54" W
   San Diego      San Diego, CA      32°43'33" N 117°10' 15" W
   Sacramento     McCllelan AFB, CA  38°40'06" N 121°24'04" W
   Astoria        Warrenton, OR      46°25'18" N 123°47' 46" W
   North Bend     North Bend, OR     43°24'39" N 124°14'35" W
   Barbers Point  Kapolei, HI        21°18'01" N 158°04'15" W
   Kodiak         Kodiak, AK         57°44'19" N 152°30'18" W
   Houston        Houston, TX        29°45'00" N 95°22'00" W
   Detroit        Mt. Clemens, MI    42°36'05" N 82°50'12" W
   San Francisco  San Francisco, CA  37°37'58" N 122°23'20" W
   Los Angeles    Los Angeles, CA    33°56'36" N 118°23'48" W
   Humboldt Bay   McKinleyville, CA  40°58'39" N 124°06'45" W
   Port Angeles   Port Angeles, WA   48°08'25" N 123°24'48" W
   Sitka          Sitka, AK          57°05'50" N 135°21'58" W

   Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

   Point  of  contact:  ARINC,  2551 Riva Road, Annapolis, MD 21401, Tel:
   1–800–633–6882,   Fax:  (410)  266–2329,  e-mail:  arincmkt@arinc.com,
   http://www.arinc.com. 

   Point  of  contact:  ARINC,  2551 Riva Road, Annapolis, MD 21401, Tel:
   1–800–633–6882, Fax: 410–266–2329, e-mail: bplnotifications@arinc.com ,
   &fnl; http://www.arinc.com .

   Table 3b—Consultation Area Coordinates for Aeronautical Receive Stations
   (1.7–30 MHz)
         Locale         Latitude                   Longitude
   Southampton, NY    40°55′15″ N   72°23′41″ W
   Molokai, HI        21°12′23″ N   157°12′30″ W
   Oahu, HI           21°22′27″ N   158°05′56″ W
   Half Moon Bay, CA  37°39′64″ N   122°24′44″ W
   Pt. Reyes, CA      38°06′00″ N   122°56′00″ W
   Barrow, AK         71°17′24″ N   156°40′12″; W
   Guam               13°28′12″ N   144°48′0.0″ E (note: Eastern Hemisphere)
   NY Comm Center, NY 40°46′48″ N   73°05′46″ W
   Cedar Rapids, IA   42°02′05.0″ N 91°38′37.6″ W
   Beaumont, CA       33°54′27.1″ N 116°59′49.1″ W
   Fairfield, TX      31°47′02.6″ N 96°47′03.0″ W
   Houston, TX        29°36′35.8″ N 95°16′54.8″ W
   Miami, FL          25°49′05″ N   80°18′28″ W

   Note:Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

   Point of contact: U.S. Coast Guard HQ, Division of Spectrum Management
   CG–622, 2100 Second St., SW., Rm. 6611, Washington, DC 20593, Tel: (202)
   267–6036, Fax: (202) 267–4106, e-mail: jtaboada@comdt.uscg.mil. 

   Table 4—Consultation Area Coordinates for Land Stations, Set 1 (1.7–30 MHz)
      Command name         Location       Latitude    Longitude
   COMMSTA Boston      Maspee, MA        41°24'00" N 70°18'57" W
   Camslant            Chesapeake, VA    36°33'59" N 76°15'23" W
   COMMSTA Miami       Miami, FL         25°36'58" N 80°23'04" W
   COMMSTA New Orleans Belle Chasse, IA  29°52'40" N 89°54'46" W
   Camspac             Pt. Reyes Sta, CA 38°06'00" N 122°55'48" W
   COMMSTA Honolulu    Wahiawa, HI       21°31'08" N 157°59'28" W
   COMMSTA Kodiak      Kodiak, AK        57°04'26' N 152°28'20" W
   Guam                Finegayan, GU     13°53'08" N 144°50'20" E

   Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

   Point of contact: COTHEN Technical Support Center, COTHEN Program Manager,
   Tel: (800) 829–6336.

   Table 5—Consultation Area Coordinates for Land Stations, Set 2 (1.7–30 MHz)
       Site name      Latitude    Longitude
   Albuquerque, NM   35°05'02" N 105°34'23" W
   Arecibo, PR       18°17'26" N 66°22'33" W
   Atlanta, GA       32°33"06 N  84°23'35" W
   Beaufort, SC      34°34'22" N 76°09'48" W
   Cape Charles, VA  37°05'37" N 75°58'06" W
   Cedar Rapids, IA  42°00'09" N 91°17'39" W
   Denver, CO        39°15'45" N 103°34'23" W
   Fort Myers, FL    81°31'20" N 26°20'01" W
   Kansas City, MO   38°22'10" N 93°21'48" W
   Las Vegas, NV     36°21'15" N 114°17'33" W
   Lovelock, NV      40°03'07" N 118°18'56" W
   Memphis, TN       34°21'57" N 90°02'43" W
   Miami, FL         25°46'20" N 80°28'48" W
   Morehead City, NC 34°34'50" N 78°13'59" W
   Oklahoma City, OK 34°30'52" N 97°30'52" W
   Orlando, FL       28°31'30" N 80°48'58" W
   Reno, NV          38°31'12" N 119°14'37" W
   Sarasota, FL      27°12'41" N 81°31'20" W
   Wilmington, NC    34°29'24" N 78°04'31" W

   Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

   Point Of Contact: ROTHR Deputy Program Manager, (540) 653–3624.

   Table 6—Consultation Area Coordinates for Radar Receiver Stations (1.7–30
   MHz)
   Latitude/Longitude
   18°01' N/66°30' W
   28°05' N/98°43' W
   36°34' N/76°18' W

   Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

   [ 70 FR 1374 , Jan. 7, 2005, as amended at  71 FR 49379 , Aug. 23, 2006]
   Browse Previous | Browse Next
             _________________________________________________

  For questions or comments regarding e-CFR editorial content, features, or
                        design, email ecfr@nara.gov.
   For questions concerning e-CFR programming and delivery issues, email
                              webteam@gpo.gov.
                        Section 508 / Accessibility
   August 1, 2007 -->


Goto Section: 47cfr80.pdf.13 | 47cfr80.pdf.17

Goto Year: 2006 | 2008
CiteFind - See documents on FCC website that cite this rule

Want to support this service?
Thanks!

Report errors in this rule. Since these rules are converted to HTML by machine, it's possible errors have been made. Please help us improve these rules by clicking the Report FCC Rule Errors link to report an error.
hallikainen.com
Helping make public information public